最新科普版8年级英语课本•上册_26秋新教材初中课本合集，各科目同步电子版一站配齐_全部版本•初中英语电子课本_科普版•初中英语电子课本

绿色印刷产品
义 务 教 育 教 科 书
英 语
八年级  上册
义
务
教
育
教
科
书
英
语
八
年
级
   
上
册
ENGLISH 
E N G L I S H
定价：10.90元
价格批准文号：
价格投诉举报电话：12315
义 务 教 育 教 科 书
英    语
八年级   上册
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
科 学 普 及 出 版 社
·北    京·
前 言
亲爱的同学们：
你们好！
本套教科书依据我国《义务教育英语课程标准（2022年版）》编写，旨在帮助你们通
过英语课程学习，在提高英语语言能力的同时，学习、传承和弘扬中华优秀文化，养成良
好思想品德，逐步提升核心素养，发展终身学习能力。
本套教科书分为六册，共三十三个单元。每个单元围绕一个主题，先由开篇页导入，
再分四个板块从不同侧面展开。
开篇页为一幅精美的主题插图，图上附有单元序号和标题、一个主题之问，以及语言
交际、文化学习、思维训练、策略运用和项目实践五个方面的学习目标。这些图文可以帮
助你们了解单元主题、明确学习目标，激发你们对单元主题的学习兴趣。
开篇页之后是“准备”板块。该板块包括听说（Listening & Speaking）、功能
（Function）和语音（Pronunciation）三个部分，主要通过听、说、看、读等活动引入
单元主题，帮助你们掌握与主题相关的语言和文化基础知识，激发你们进一步探索单元主
题的兴趣。
接下来是“探索”板块。该板块包括思维技能（Thinking Skills）、阅读策略
（Reading Strategies）、主题阅读（Theme Reading）和语法应用（Grammar in 
Use）四个部分。思维技能和阅读策略以专项训练的方式进行，并在主题阅读活动中复现。
主题阅读通过一个语篇和多个紧密相连的活动引导你们从语言、文化、思维、策略等不同
视角对单元主题进行探索。语法应用分为词法和句法应用，帮助你们在梳理语法规则的同
时，进一步对单元主题进行探索。
之后是“拓展”板块。该板块包括口头交际（Oral Communication）和以读促写
（Reading for Writing）两个部分，分别以口头产出和笔头产出为目的，采取先听后讨
论、先读后仿写的形式，帮助你们围绕单元主题进行拓展学习。
最后是“收篇”板块。该板块包括项目实践（Project）、复习（Review）和自评
（Self-assessment）三个部分。项目实践强调使用语言做事情，要求你们使用英语并通过
动手做来完成一项小组合作实践项目。复习部分重点复习单元的词汇和语法，同时通过听
说和阅读活动补充或升华单元的主题学习。自评部分以主观题和客观题相结合的方式，帮
助你们对单元主题学习、活动参与情况、学习计划等进行回顾和反思。
II
Scope and Sequence
Unit
Preparing for the Topic
My Dream Job
P 1
Listening & Speaking  
Different jobs
 
Function
Longing for future jobs
 
Pronunciation  
Sonorization & Incomplete plosion
The World 
of Art
P 19
Listening & Speaking  
Different forms and works of art
 
Function  
Weekend plans
 
Pronunciation  
Sonorization, Incomplete plosion 
& Liaison
Sound Body,
Sound Mind
P 37
Listening & Speaking  
Illnesses and habits
 
Function
Seeing a doctor
 
Pronunciation 
Assimilation & Liaison
1
2
3
III
Exploring the Topic
Developing 
the Topic
Wrapping Up 
the Topic
Thinking Skills 
Identifying the topic and main idea
 
Reading Strategies 
Visualizing
 
Theme Reading 
Taikonaut Deng Qingming
 
Grammar in Use  
Suffixes -er, -or, -ian and -ist 
The simple future tense
Oral Communication 
Talking about your 
dream job
 
Reading for Writing 
My dream job  
Project 
Making a card of your 
family member’s 
workday
Review
 
Self-assessment
Thinking Skills 
Classifying details
 
Reading Strategies 
Drawing conclusions
 
Theme Reading  
A Chinese painting — Along the River 
During the Qingming Festival
 
Grammar in Use  
Indefinite pronouns & Adverbs of place/time 
Exclamatory sentences
Oral Communication 
Talking about Chinese 
folk art
 
Reading for Writing 
Loving art 
 
Project 
Planning for an art 
festival in your school
 
Review
Self-assessment
Thinking Skills 
Comparing and contrasting
 Reading Strategies 
Taking notes
 Theme Reading 
Positive attitudes
 Grammar in Use  
Prefixes non-, dis-, un-, mis-, in- and 
    im-
need to do/don’t need to do/needn’t do
Oral Communication 
Talking about healthy 
eating habits
Reading for Writing 
Keeping healthy  
 
Project 
Making a poster about 
a healthy lifestyle
 
Review
 
Self-assessment
IV
Scope and Sequence
Unit
Preparing for the Topic
Changing and 
Growing
P 55
Listening & Speaking 
Senses and stress control
 
Function
Li Hong’s problems at school
 
Pronunciation 
Rhythm & Stress
Amazing 
Places
P 73
Listening & Speaking   
Landmarks in the world
 
Function
The Palace Museum
 
Pronunciation 
Sense group & Pause
Earth and 
Beyond
P 91
Listening & Speaking   
The solar system
 
Function
A stargazing experience
 
Pronunciation 
Stress, Pause & Rhythm
Notes to the Text  P 109         Grammar  P 118         Tapescripts  P 128 
4
5
6
Appendices
V
Exploring the Topic
Developing 
the Topic
Wrapping Up 
the Topic
Thinking Skills
Understanding character development
 
Reading Strategies
Reading with a purpose
 
Theme Reading  
Li Xiang’s past school year
 
Grammar in Use  
Suffixes -less and -ful                                              
The past continuous tense
Oral Communication 
Talking about problems 
of growing up and 
solutions to them
 
Reading for Writing  
Growing in the past 
year 
 
Project 
Sharing your story of 
growing pains 
 
Review
 
Self-assessment
Thinking Skills 
Distinguishing facts from opinions
 
Reading Strategies 
Making inferences 
 
Theme Reading 
Honghe Hani Rice Terraces in Yunnan
 
Grammar in Use  
The suffix -y     
The infinitive to do
Oral Communication
Talking about an 
unforgettable trip
 
Reading for Writing 
An amazing place 
 
Project 
Making a poster 
about a world-famous 
landmark
 
Review
 
Self-assessment
Thinking Skills
Comparing and contrasting
 
Reading Strategies 
Summarizing
 
Theme Reading  
The amazing solar system
 
Grammar in Use 
The suffix -ness                                                 
Comparative and superlative adjectives
Oral Communication 
Talking about future 
lives on other planets
 
Reading for Writing 
Earth and its neighbors 
 
Project 
Making a fact file about 
a planet
 
Review
 
Self-assessment
Words in Each Unit   P 135          Vocabulary         P 148          Useful Expressions in Each Unit  P 161   
Attached Word List  P 164          English Names  P 166          Names of Places  P 167          Irregular Verbs P 168
Big Question: What do you want to be?
In this unit, you will learn to:
 introduce your dream job.
 plan for future jobs.
  use a chart to identify the topic and main idea.
 use the reading strategy of visualizing.
 make a card of your family member’s workday.
UNIT
My Dream Job
My Dream Job
1
A. Match the jobs (a–h) with the people at the top of the next page, and 
      then add more jobs.
B. Fill in each blank with a suitable job above.
C.         Pair work. Listen and repeat, and then replace the parts in bold
     and practice with your partner.
What is the man doing, Xiao Ya?
What’s your dream job?
More Jobs
He is flying a plane. He is a pilot.
I want to be an artist.
Preparing for the Topic
UNIT
1
Activity  1
__________ shows people around a place.
__________ builds or repairs houses.
__________ studies science.            
__________ works in the office.
__________ makes films.    
__________ sends letters.
__________ paints or draws pictures.
__________ flies planes.    
Listening & Speaking
Different jobs
e. artist
f. guide
g. pilot
h. scientist
a. director
b. postman
c. office worker
d. builder
UNIT 1
2
       Listen to the riddles and fill in the blanks.
Group work. Write riddles about different jobs and ask your 
partners to guess the jobs. 
Pencils, brushes, paper and erasers are my 
tools. I ______ or paint in the park, by the 
______ or at other places. What do I do?
Activity  2
Activity  3
Let me see. Oh, you are a(n) ______.
Let me see! I believe you are a(n) ______.
I work with actors, actresses and other artists. 
I give directions to them. Together with them, 
I produce ______. What do I do?
UNIT 1
3
Pair work. Talk about your dream job and explain why you want 
to do it in the future. 
       Listen to the conversation and number the pictures.
       Listen again and complete the table.
Group work. Interview your group members about their 
personalities, hobbies and dream jobs, and then report to the class.
Wang Junfeng: Hi, Lingling. How are you doing today?
Lingling:           Not bad. I just got back from the pet hospital.
Wang Wei:        What happened to your dog, Lingling?
Lingling:           It got sick yesterday. But thanks to the vets, it’s doing better now.
Wang Wei:        The vets are kind and helpful. I will be a vet like them because I 
love pets.
Wang Junfeng: That’s great! I’m sure you will be an excellent vet. What are 
you going to be, Lingling?
Lingling:           I am going to be a dancer. I think I’m lively, and I love dancing
                           very much.
Wang Wei:        How about you, Junfeng?
Wang Junfeng: I am going to be a news reporter. You know, I’m active and 
love following the news.
Wang Wei:        That sounds wonderful! Maybe one day you will write a news
                            report about Lingling.
Character
Personality
Hobby
Dream Job
Wang Wei
___________
keeping pets
a ___________
Lingling
___________
dancing
a dancer
Wang Junfeng
active
__________ the news a news ___________
Activity  1
Activity  2
Activity  3
Activity  4
Longing for future jobs
Function
UNIT 1
4
1. I wan(t) to be a news reporter.    
2. There are many backu(p) team members.  
3. Gui(de) dog teachers train gui(de) dogs to hel(p) blin(d) people. 
4. She too(k) goo(d) care of the children. 
        Listen and read the words aloud. Pay attention to the 
pronunciation of the blue letters.
        Listen and chant. Circle the words with the pronunciation 
of sonorization.
        Listen and read the 
words and phrases. Pay attention to 
the incomplete plosions.
        Listen and read the sentences. Pay attention to the incomplete 
plosions.
dire(c)tor
do(c)tor
sui(t)case
han(d)bag
blac(k)board
pos(t)card
shar(p) pencil
goo(d)bye
ho(t) tea 
si(t) down  
nex(t) door
ta(ke) care
we(t) ground
har(d) times
bi(g) toy
scare  scarf  score           skirt    skill    sky           speak  spell  sport 
stand  story  study  style    stress  street  strong  strict
Pronunciation
Activity  1
Activity  2
Activity  3
Activity  4
The consonants in the brackets 
here are usually pronounced as 
stops before /p/, /b/, /t/, /d/, /k/ and /g/.
TIPS
Sonorization & Incomplete plosion
Jobs
We are learning about different jobs today. 
Speak out with your friends and do as I say. 
You’re a happy baker, baking a delicious cake. 
You’re a pilot with many flights to take. 
You’re a fashion model with fine style.
You’re a singing rock star with a big smile.
Stand up, be careful, and wear a tall crown. 
That’s great! You’ve got the job. Now,
please sit down.
UNIT 1
5
Look at the pictures and read the text, and then learn how to 
identify the topic and main idea.
Read the text and complete the chart.
Pair work. Talk about jobs at night based on Activity 2.
We sleep at night, but some people do their jobs at night. For example, many 
doctors and nurses work at night because patients need help. Some railway 
workers also work at night because a few trains run during night time. 
A lot of people work with animals. Some people 
help sick animals. For example, vets often help 
sick animals on the farm, in the zoo or in the 
animal park. Some people train animals to do jobs 
for people. For example, guide dog teachers train 
guide dogs to help blind people.
Exploring the Topic
Thinking Skills
UNIT
1
Identifying the topic and main idea
Activity  1
Activity  2
Activity  3
The topic is often the general subject of a text. It is usually the title. The main idea is 
about the topic. It is often the topic sentence.
Topic: Jobs with Animals
Main idea: A lot of people work 
                      with animals.
Detail: Some people help sick animals.
Detail: Some people train animals to do jobs for people.
Topic:
_____________________________
Main idea:
_____________________________
Detail: _______________________________________________________
Detail: _______________________________________________________
Jobs with Animals
Jobs at Night
UNIT 1
6
Read the text in Activity 2 again and follow the steps to visualize.
Pair work. Underline the words and phrases that help you 
visualize, and then complete the sentences and share the steps with your 
partner.
When you are reading a text, try to picture what you are reading in your mind to help 
you understand the text.
Steps to visualize:
 I read about _____________________________ in the fire station.
 I see in my mind __________________________________________________.
 Now I understand __________________________________________________. 
Steps to visualize:
 I read about modern farmers in 
    the future.
 I see in my mind green __________ 
    and good environment.
 Now I understand modern farmers 
    can _________________________.
My Dream Job
I want to be a modern farmer in the 
future. Modern farmers grow more 
green food and care more about 
people’s health. They try to protect 
the environment and make the 
world a better place.
Visualizing
Read the text and underline the key words and phrases that 
help you visualize. 
We had a job experience day at the fire station today. We heard the alarm 
and received a fire call. A house was on fire and a child was on the sofa in 
the bedroom. We put on the fireman uniforms, rushed to the house, saved 
the child and put out the fire. From this experience, we learned how to put 
out fire and save people from fire. Fighting fires is very dangerous, and 
firemen are brave.
Activity  2
Activity  3
Activity  1
Friday
Sunny
Reading Strategies
UNIT 1
7
Pair work. Look at the pictures and talk about the questions.
Read the text. Underline the key words and phrases that help 
you visualize, and then complete the sentences about the steps of 
visualizing. 
 I read about how Deng Qingming __________________________________. 
 I see in my mind Deng Qingming in a tiny space with ___________________ 
_________________________________________________.
 Now I understand ____________________ will pay off.
Deng Qingming is a taikonaut with a great dream. In 1998, he joined China’s 
space team as a young pioneer. From the very first day, he made a promise to 
himself — to fly into space one day.
To prepare for that day, he started a long and hard journey of training with his 
teammates. They trained, for example, to live in a small space, eat special space 
food, work under strong lights and go without showers. They knew that they must 
always be ready, both in mind and body, for flying and working in space.
For nearly 25 years, Deng had no chance to fly into space. But he did not give up. 
He kept training and always believed in his dream. Finally, his hard work paid off. 
On November 29, 2022, Deng flew into space on the Shenzhou-15 spaceship.
Deng succeeded by holding on to his dream and working hard for it. He sets an 
excellent example to us all. His story teaches us that our dreams will one day come 
true as long as we keep going.
1. What job are the photos about?  
2. What do people need to do for this job?
3. What do you know about Deng Qingming in the third picture?
Activity  1
Activity  2
Theme Reading
Taikonaut Deng Qingming
UNIT 1
8
Match the words with their meanings according to the text.
 Read the text again and complete the following chart.
Activity  4
Activity  3
Group work. Discuss the questions and share your ideas.
Activity  5
Topic:
___________________________ 
Main idea:
___________________________ 
Detail:
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
Detail:
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
Detail:
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
Detail:
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
1. What can we learn from Deng Qingming?
2. What qualities should a taikonaut have according to the story of  Deng Qingming? 
train                                 one of the first people to do something
tiny                                 towards the future
journey                               to learn the skills, especially for a job
forward                               very small 
pioneer                            the act of traveling from one place to another
UNIT 1
9
Look at the pictures and read the sentences. Pay attention to 
the words in bold.
Make new words by adding suffixes, and then complete the 
sentences.
Activity  1
Activity  2
Activity  3
My brother likes 
acting. He wants to 
be an actor.
My sister really likes 
playing the piano.
She wants to be a 
pianist.
My aunt works 
carefully in the 
library. She is a 
librarian.
My grandpa works 
on a farm. He is a 
farmer.  
I want to be a teacher or a doctor. I enjoy teaching 
children, and I love making friends with them. I also 
hope to help people with their illnesses, so I would be 
very happy to be a doctor in the future. My brother 
has a different idea about his dream job. He wants to 
be an explorer. He is interested in mountains, rivers 
and forests on Earth, as well as stars in space. He is 
very curious about the secrets of nature.
Read the text and circle the jobs, and then underline the reasons.
1. Zhenzhen likes drawing, and she wants to be a(n) 
    ________.
2. Wenbo is interested in tennis, and he likes to be a
    tennis ________.
3. Ziwen began to learn dancing at the age of 5. Her
    dream job is a(n) ________.
4. Jim likes watching movies and he dreams of becoming 
a(n) ________ one day.
5. Xuanxuan is good at music. She wants to be a(n) 
    ________ in the future.
music
art 
play
direct
dance
-er
-or
-ian
-ist
+
Grammar in Use
Suffixes -er, -or, -ian and -ist
UNIT 1
10
Read the text and fill in the blanks with will or be going to. 
Change the word form when necessary. 
Pair work. Read the conversation. Pay attention to will and be 
going to.
The simple future tense
My cousin Zihan is 13 years old. She enjoys 
cooking and she _____________ be a cook in 
the future. Next week, Zihan _____________ take 
part in the Top Ten Young Cooks of the Year 
Competition. After that, she _____________ write 
an interesting cook book for kids. She hopes to 
encourage kids to learn cooking. Her friends 
and family are very proud of her. They think 
Zihan’s book _____________ be a big success. 
Activity  1
Activity  2
Activity  3
Yes. We are going to 
talk about dream jobs.
Will you share your opinion? 
Hi, Kangkang. We will 
have a class meeting 
tomorrow.
Of course, I will.
Great! Look at the clouds. 
It is going to rain.
Take it easy. The rain 
won’t last long. 
Complete the table and learn how to use the simple future tense.
The simple future tense
be going to
I’m going to be a dancer, and my brother ___________ be an officer.
Are you going to be artists?
Yes, we are./No, ___________.
What are they going to be?
They ___________ be artists.
will
I ___________ vote for Kangkang as our team head.
Will you choose to be a lawyer?
Yes, I will./No, I ___________.
UNIT 1
11
A.        Listen to the monologs and match the names with the jobs.
B.        Listen again and fill in the blanks.
Group work. Survey your group members about their dream 
jobs and complete the table, and then report to the class.
He is going to study hard 
and do __________ every 
day. He won’t give up his 
dream.
She loves __________ 
very much. She’ll learn 
how to take care of 
them and try to be their 
__________.
He wants to help _____
_______ people and he 
will go to a __________ 
school to achieve his 
dream.
Developing the Topic
UNIT
1
Activity  1
Activity  2
Name
What’s your 
dream job?
Why is it your 
dream job?
How are you going to  
make it come true?
Oral Communication
Talking about your dream job
Li Xiang 
zookeeper
Li Hong
pilot
Kangkang
doctor
UNIT 1
12
Read the text about Zhao Yang’s dream job and complete the 
chart.
Activity  2
1. My dream job is …
2. I started dreaming about … at the age of …
3. In order to make it come true, I will …
Pair work. Complete the sentences and then talk about your 
dream jobs.
My dream job
Activity  1
My Dream Job
My dream job is a plane engineer.
When I was twelve, my father bought me a toy plane. 
I liked it a lot and became interested in planes. Now 
my dream is to design great planes for our country.
To make it happen, I will study hard at school. At the 
same time, I’m going to join the model plane club in 
my school. I will make some friends there and we can 
learn scientific knowledge about planes together. I 
know it is not easy to become a plane engineer, and I 
will meet a lot of challenges. However, I will try my 
best to make my dream come true.
Reading for Writing
What’s your 
dream job?
What will 
you do?
Step 1:
Step 3:
Step 2:
When did you dream 
of becoming a/an ...?
UNIT 1
13
Useful phrases
Useful sentence patterns
become interested in … 
try one’s best to …
come true 
My dream job is …
To make it happen, …
It is (not) easy to …
However, …
Draw a chart about your dream 
job and draft your essay. The phrases and 
sentence patterns may help you.
Activity  3
Detail:
_________________________________________________________
Detail:
_________________________________________________________
Topic:
___________________________  
Main idea:
___________________________   
It is helpful for you to collect 
and remember useful phrases 
and sentence patterns in your writing.
TIPS
Rate your draft, and then complete your essay. 
Activity  4
How well can you ____________________ ?
Self-
rating
Partner’s 
rating
express your view of career  
use the thinking skill of organizing the topic and the 
main idea
introduce your dream job
organize ideas into a well-balanced structure
use the theme vocabulary of the unit
use the simple future tense
use punctuation
spell the words
Please ask your partner to review your draft for errors and offer suggestions for improvement.
1-Needs improvement; 2-Satisfactory; 3-Good; 4-Excellent
UNIT 1
14
Wrapping Up the Topic
UNIT
1
Pair work. Look at the card about the workday of Li Xue’s mom 
and talk about it with your partner.
Share your family member’s workday in class.
Group work. Make a card of your family member’s workday and 
share it with your partners.
Project
Activity  1
Activity  2
Activity  3
Making a card of your family member’s 
workday
Put a picture here. 
Job: _____________
Job: Librarian
Job: Librarian
Working hours: ________________________
Daily work: 
•  ____________________________________
•  ____________________________________
•  ____________________________________
Feeling: ______________________________
Working hours:  9:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. from 
                             Monday to Friday
Daily work: 
•  put the books on the shelves in order
•  help readers check books in and out
•  check the library records
•  introduce new books to readers
Feeling: My mom loves her job very much.
UNIT 1
15
        Pair work. Listen to the interview and complete the table, 
and then ask and answer about Xiaolu’s job.
• love doing research in science
• be interested in showing tourists around 
   different places
• care about rules and public things
• be a deep thinker and love the arts
• an artist 
• a police officer
• a guide
• a scientist
1. Chuchu ________________________________.  She wants to be ____________.
2. Feiyang ________________________________.  He is going to be ___________.
3. Jiahui _________________________________.   He wants to be _____________.
4. Dora _________________________________.  She will work as ____________.
5. I _____________________________________. My dream job is _____________.
Pair work. Match the activities in Box A with the jobs in Box B, 
and then make sentences and share with your partner.
Review
Activity  1
Activity  2
Xiaolu’s Job
Job
Dentist
Reason
• She wants to help people with 
  their ________.
• The job ________ well.
Experience
• Went to a medical school
• Worked very hard and did well
   in all her __________ 
Plan
• To get more __________
• To __________ more 
A
B
UNIT 1
16
Pair work. Complete the conversation with will or be going to, 
and then practice with your partner.
Read the text and answer the questions.
A: What are you going to do this weekend?
B: I _______________________ (take photos) with my new camera.
A: Can you show me how to use a camera?
B: OK. I _______________________ (show) you after school.
A: Thanks. I _______________________ (take part in) a speech competition about
     “My Dream Job” with my classmates. Can you take some photos for me? 
B: When is the competition?
A: Next Wednesday.
B: No problem. I ________________________ (come) and cheer you on. Maybe I 
_______________________ (join) your speech team next term.
1. What was the writer’s first job?
2. How did she feel about her first job?
3. What did she often do before the bookstore opened or after it closed? 
4. How does she feel about her work now?
5. Do you think she will be successful? Why or why not?
Activity  3
Activity  4
I first worked as a waitress. Every day, I greeted guests with a warm smile 
and led them to their tables. I also carried meals and drinks from the kitchen 
to their tables. The work was boring, and I had to work for long hours. Soon 
after, I found a new job at a bookstore. With shelves of books all around me, 
I really enjoyed my work. Before the bookstore opened or after it closed, 
I often took books from the shelves to read. I always shared my reading 
experiences with my customers and had 
interesting conversations with them. 
Last year, I became the new manager. 
Moving from the noisy restaurant to the 
quiet bookstore, and from a waitress to a 
manager, is not just a simple job change 
but a big change in my life. 
UNIT 1
17
Self -assessment
1. How much do you enjoy the topic?
I’m interested in the topic of my dream job.
I will try my best to be ___________________ in the future,
because _________________________________________. 
2. How well can you use the language and cultural knowledge?
I can use proper sonorization and incomplete plosions.   
I can use the vocabulary for/of jobs.
I can use the suffixes -er/-or/-ian/-ist and simple future tense.
I can plan for my future jobs.
3. How well can you use English to perform the activities? 
I can talk about different jobs.
I can understand the texts and recordings in this unit.
I can discuss future jobs with my partners.
I can write about my dream job.
4. How well can you use thinking skills and learning strategies?
I can identify the topic and main idea.
I can use visualizing strategy in reading.
I can work with my partner(s) in pair/group work.
5. How are you satisfied with your group project?
I can make a card of my family member’s workday.
I can report our project to the class.
6. How are you going to improve your English learning?
  ____________________________________________________________________ 
  ____________________________________________________________________
UNIT 1
18
Big Question: Why do we make art?
In this unit, you will learn to:
 introduce different kinds of art.
 enjoy different art forms and artworks.
  use a chart to classify details.
 use the reading strategy of drawing conclusions.
 plan for an art festival in your school.
UNIT
The World of Art
The World of Art
2
A. Match the forms of art  (a–f) with the pictures at the top of the next page.
B. Fill in each blank with the correct work in the left box.
C.         Pair work. Listen and repeat, and then replace the parts in bold 
and practice with your partner.
I like calligraphy best.
What’s your favorite form of art? 
What’s your favorite calligraphy work?
1. ____________ is a very famous ballet. 
2. The drama, ____________, shows the changes of 
Chinese people’s life over half a century.
3. ____________ can best express the great spirit of
    the Chinese people to fight for the country.
4. ____________ is one of the four great classic novels 
    of Chinese literature.
5. The ____________ is an oil painting by the Italian
    artist, scientist and engineer Leonardo da Vinci.
6. Wang Xizhi is a Chinese calligrapher. __________
    _______ is one of his famous works.
Swan Lake 
Journey to the West
Teahouse
Lanting Xu
Mona Lisa
Yellow River Cantata
b. drama
e. painting
a. literature
d. dancing
c. music
f. calligraphy
Activity  1
Preparing for the Topic
UNIT
2
Lanting Xu. It is one of Wang Xizhi’s 
famous works. 
Listening & Speaking
Different forms and works of art 
UNIT 2
20
       Listen to the text and tick the words or phrases you hear.
Pair work. Talk about your favorite form of art and the famous 
artworks you know. 
Activity  2
Activity  3
an ancient Chinese building
photography works
calligraphy works
paintings 
an ancient money show
UNIT 2
21
Pair work. Match the following works with their materials, and 
talk about where you can often see them. 
       Listen to the conversation and complete the exclamatory 
sentences.
       Listen again and match the names with the activities.
Pair work. Suppose you want to take part in your school art 
show. Talk about what you would like to do and how you will do it.
Xuanxuan: Hi, Lingling. What are you going to do this weekend?
Lingling:    Hi, Xuanxuan. I plan to go to the City Park with my aunt.
Xuanxuan: How exciting! Are you going to watch the gardening show?
Lingling:    That’s correct. How do you know about it?
Xuanxuan: My mom told me. She loves gardening.
Lingling:    Wonderful! I enjoy gardening, too. I often help the workers in the
                    park near our community. Here are some photos on my phone.
(Lingling and Xuanxuan are looking at the photos on Lingling’s phone.)
Xuanxuan: Wow, how beautiful the park is!
Lingling:    Join us, and we can enjoy more green works there.
Xuanxuan: I’d love to, but I have to practice for the baseball match next week.
Lingling:    What a pity!
 wood
sand
grass
snow
Activity  1
Activity  2
Activity  3
Activity  4
1. How ______________ !          3. How __________ the park is!
2. Wonderful!                          4. What a _________ !
Weekend plans
plans to go to the gardening show.
learns about the show from her mother.
enjoys gardening.
helps the workers in the park.
prepares for a match next week.
Lingling
Xuanxuan
Function
UNIT 2
22
blue
bread
clear
crazy
flag
snow
free
glad
great
plane
press
spider
quiet
slow
 small
snake
spoon
spring
star
swim
street 
throw
smile
sport
pi(c)ture
su(c)cess
su(b)ject
mi(d)night
a bi(g) zoo
stan(d) for
a goo(d) view
ge(t) through
goo(d) luck
ma(ke) sure
hel(p) me
a swee(t) dream
1. A: What’s your favorite art form? 
  B: My favorite is pop music.                                  
2. A: Do you like music?
  B: Yes, I do. Music can help me feel better. 
       Listen and read the words aloud. Pay attention to the 
pronunciation of the blue letters. 
       Listen and read the words and phrases. Pay attention to the 
incomplete plosions.
       Listen and chant. Pay attention to the incomplete plosions.
       Listen and mark the incomplete plosions with brackets, and 
then read the sentences with correct incomplete plosions and liaisons. 
Activity  1
Activity  2
Activity  3
Activity  4
Pronunciation
Today I wan(t) to do some art,  
with a pain(t) brush, paper an(d) black ink. 
I wonder wha(t) to do to start.  
I nee(d) to ta(ke) some time to think.   
While you sing, dance, and do your part,
I’ll pain(t) pictures in blue and pink.
Sonorization, Incomplete plosion & 
Liaison
UNIT 2
23
Read the text and complete the detail-classification chart.
Look at the picture and read the text, and then learn how to 
classify details.
What is music? Music is a language. It can help us speak our minds and allow us to 
communicate heart to heart. Music is a tool of showing feelings. It can relax us and 
make us feel happy, afraid or sad. Music is a medium. It can take us to a world of art 
and bring together people all over the world.
• ____________________
• ____________________
It’s a tool of __________.
• ____________________
• ____________________
It’s a language.
According to the types of musical instruments, there 
are four families: string instruments, beat instruments, 
keyboard instruments and wind instruments. The 
violin and erhu belong to the string instruments and 
the drum belongs to the beat instruments. The piano 
is an example of the keyboard instruments, and the 
trumpet is a wind instrument.
String instruments
 violin and erhu
Beat instruments
 drum
Keyboard instruments
 piano
There are four types of 
musical instruments.
Wind instruments
 trumpet
Pair work. Talk about the benefits of music based on Activity 2.
What is music?
Classifying details
Exploring the Topic
UNIT
2
Activity  1
Activity  2
Activity  3
• _________________________________
• _________________________________
It’s a __________.
When you classify details, you group similar details together in some way.
Thinking Skills
UNIT 2
24
Read the text about the famous Beijing opera artist, 
Mei Lanfang, and learn how to draw a conclusion.
Read more about Mei Lanfang. Complete the sentences and 
draw another conclusion.
Read the text about Qi Baishi. Underline the sentence that helps 
you draw a conclusion, and then complete the last two steps.
After reading a text, you can combine what you read and what you know to draw a 
conclusion about what the author doesn’t say directly.
Good actors know how to use their eyes to express their minds. To 
train his eyes, Mei Lanfang often watched the pigeons flying far 
away in the sky.
When Mei was young, he had great difficulty in remembering the lines of Beijing opera. 
But he worked very hard and was very strict with himself. He got up very early every 
day and practiced the lines again and again. 
Qi Baishi first learned painting all by himself. Then in his twenties, he began to travel 
around China to visit famous painters and study their paintings. Finally, in his mid-
fifties, his paintings became popular, and he became famous all over China.
What you read
What you read
What you read
Mei was a great Beijing opera artist.
________________ makes perfect.
It is very important for us to ______________________.
Mei often trained his eyes by watching the pigeons flying.
Mei got up very early and _____________________________.
The underlined sentence.
The eye training was helpful.
Mei remembered the lines through _____________________.
Qi learned a lot from ________________________________.
Drawing conclusions
Activity  1
Activity  2
Activity  3
What you know
What you know
What you know
Now you conclude
Now you conclude
Now you conclude
Reading Strategies
UNIT 2
25
Pair work. Look at the pictures and complete the exclamatory 
sentences by using the word“how”or“what”.
Read the text. Draw your conclusion about the value of the 
painting by completing the sentence. 
The painting has great value in showing the colorful daily life of ________ 
_______________________ in the Northern Song Dynasty.
Hi, everyone! This is an amazing Chinese painting, Along the River During 
the Qingming Festival. With the painting, we can travel back to the Northern 
Song Dynasty. 
The painting is 528.7 centimeters long and 24.8 centimeters wide. It shows 
the colorful daily life of different people at work and play. Now, let’s travel 
back to Tomb-sweeping Day in the city of Kaifeng. Look over there! There 
is a great bridge over the river. A line of workers are pulling a boat under the 
bridge and shouting out their work song all the way along the riverside. On 
the river, we can see ships full of tourists. They are chatting and drinking. 
On the riverbanks, shops are selling all kinds of goods, such as toys and 
clothes. On the right side, a huge gate tower marks the door to the city. Many 
businessmen and tourists are going in or out through the gate.
What a great piece of art it is! Now follow me to explore some other works 
of art of the Northern Song Dynasty. 
Activity  1
Activity  2
1. ______ a huge gate tower it is!           2. ______ colorful people’s daily life is!
3. ______ crowded the bridge is!            4. ______ a wonderful painting!
Theme Reading
A Chinese painting — Along the 
River During the Qingming Festival
UNIT 2
26
Answer the questions according to the text.
Fill in the blanks with the phrases in the box.
Read the text again and complete the detail-classification chart.
Workers
 pulling _________
   _______________
 _______________
   their work song
                 
 _________________
  on the ships
 going in or out 
   through __________ 
Businessmen
 selling _________________________
     _______________________________
 going in or out through the gate
Different people at 
work and play
Activity  4
Activity  5
Activity  3
over there                shout out                all kinds of                such as
1. People _________ a work song together in order to keep the work going well.
2. A shop in the painting sells _________ goods to crowds of people coming and going.
3. There is a big crowd _________, looking at the beautiful painting. 
4. Besides Along the River During the Qingming Festival, there are many other
     famous Chinese paintings, _________ A Hundred Horses by Lang Shining, A
    Thousand Li of Rivers and Mountains by Wang Ximeng, etc.
1. What’s the title of the painting? 
2. When did the painter paint it? 
3. Which festival did the painting show? 
4. What do you think of the painting? Why?
UNIT 2
27
Look at the pictures and read the sentences. Pay attention to 
the words in bold. 
Complete the sentences with the words in the box.
Read the text and circle the correct words.
Movies can tell stories about (something/anything). They can take us 
(anywhere/somewhere) in the world, and they can bring us back to history or 
into the future (anytime/sometime). By making movies, we can create a magic 
world of (nothing/something). In the magic world of movies, there is (nothing/
something) impossible. Movies always have something for (no one/someone), 
so we all love watching movies. 
anything      someone      anywhere      something      everything
Everyone should 
know the importance 
of traditional 
buildings. No one 
should harm them. 
She would like to 
read something, 
but right now she 
has nothing new to 
read.
I looked for my 
notebook everywhere.
I thought it was 
somewhere in the 
room. 
The painting on the 
wall is beautiful. 
Anybody can see 
this. But nobody 
knows anything 
about the painter.
Activity  1
Activity  2
Activity  3
1. Art can be about __________ beautiful in life.
2. A painter can create __________ really magical.
3. A film can take us ___________, from the real world to the unknown.
4. I express _________ with music. I can’t live without music.  
5. In a novel, a writer often writes about the life of _________.
Grammar in Use
Indefinite pronouns & Adverbs of 
place/time
UNIT 2
28
Look at the pictures and make exclamatory sentences.
Pair work. Read the conversation. Pay attention to the 
exclamatory sentences.
I’d like to, but I have 
to practice basketball 
with Junfeng.
How exciting！
How wonderful it is！ 
I’m going to a concert.
You know, I’m really 
into music. I can enjoy 
my favorite songs.
Exclamatory sentences
Activity  1
Activity  2
Activity  3
study hard 
  fat cat
beautiful flowers
great fun
delicious food
awful weather 
Complete the table and learn how to use the exclamatory 
sentences.
Exclamatory sentences: What ...!/How ...!
Structure
 ________ + n. (+S+v.)!
 ________ + adj./adv. (+S+v.)!
Example
 ________ an exciting film!   
 ________ sweet the song sounds! 
 ________ great paintings they are! 
 ________ well the girl is dancing!
What a pity!
How hard the boy studies!
Why not come with me?
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
_____________________
UNIT 2
29
Group work. Look at the pictures and discuss the Chinese traditions, 
and then report to the class. The questions in the box may help you.
Paper-cut is a very _________ Chinese folk art. It has a history of over 
_________ years. People use scissors and paper to cut out _________ shapes. 
People use paper-cuts to express their _________ and hopes. They also cut out 
the Chinese character “Fu” and put it upside down on the door. It is a symbol of 
_________. 
A.        Listen to the conversation and number the pictures.
B.        Listen again and fill in the blanks.
Developing the Topic
UNIT
2
Activity  1
Activity  2
Chinese clay
Spring Festival couplets
New Year picture
Oral Communication
Talking about Chinese folk art
UNIT 2
30
Questions:
1. What are they?
2. When do you use them?
3. Where do you put them?
4. Why do you use them on some special days?
Falling in Love with Beijing Opera
My name is Lingling. When I was six, my grandfather 
introduced Beijing opera to me, and I fell in love with it 
immediately. 
I like Beijing opera for many reasons. First, the actors wear 
colorful masks. Each color stands for a different type of 
character. For example, a red mask means a good person, 
and a white mask means a bad person. Second, I think the 
acting of the different roles is really amazing. There are 
four main roles in Beijing opera—Sheng, Dan, Jing and 
Chou. Each plays its part in its own way. Third, I like the 
singing style and the music. The singing style of Beijing 
opera is very popular among its fans, and the traditional 
Chinese instruments like erhu and sanxian make the music 
so pleasant to the ear. 
I hope more people around the world can enjoy this great art.
1. What traditional Chinese arts do you know?
2. Which one do you like best?
3. Why is it your favorite art?
Pair work. Talk about the following questions and share your 
ideas with your partner.
Loving art
Activity  1
Read the text about Lingling’s favorite art and complete the chart.
Activity  2
Reading for Writing
Before you write 
a passage, you 
can discuss the topic with 
your classmates to have 
more ideas.  
TIPS
UNIT 2
31
Draw a detail-classification chart of your favorite art and draft 
your essay. The phrases and sentence patterns may help you.
Rate your draft, and then complete your essay. 
Useful phrases
Useful sentence patterns
introduce … to …  
fall in love with …       stand for …  
in one’s own way
be popular among …
I like … for many reasons.
… is/are really amazing.
I hope … 
Activity  3
Activity  4
_________     
 ______________
   ______________
_________
 ______________
   ______________
Why does Lingling 
like Beijing opera?
How well can you ____________________ ?
Self-
rating
Partner’s 
rating
express your view of loving traditional arts
use the thinking skill of classifying details
introduce your favorite art
organize ideas into a well-balanced structure
use the theme vocabulary of the unit
use exclamatory sentences
use punctuation
spell the words
_________
 ______________
 ______________
1-Needs improvement; 2-Satisfactory; 3-Good; 4-Excellent
Please ask your partner to review your draft for errors and offer suggestions for improvement.
UNIT 2
32
Read a report about a school art festival, and then answer the 
questions. 
Group work. Make a plan for an art festival in your school and 
then make a poster.
Report your group work to your class and share your plan for an 
art festival.
Planning for an art festival in your school
Wrapping Up the Topic
UNIT
2
Activity  1
Activity  2
Activity  3
1. How long did the art festival last?
2. What did the students enjoy in the art festival?
Time: 
Place: 
Activities/Shows: 
 Art Festival
 Draw the pictures here.
Any art form is welcome!
On September 8th, the Sunny Hill Middle School held an art festival 
in the stadium. The art festival started at 3:00 p.m. and ended at 6:00 
p.m. There were many different kinds of class shows, such as singing, 
dancing and plays. The shows were great and everyone enjoyed the 
festival very much!
Play the piano
Project
UNIT 2
33
Main ideas
Supporting details
Art is an important part of 
our life.
Everyone is a(n) _________. We can draw 
pictures, take photos and make  _________.
Art is a kind of _________ 
of the heart.
Sometimes art can speak better than 
_________.
Art is a creative activity.
Art can keep our minds _________.
       Pair work. Listen to the conversation and complete the table, 
and then talk about the importance of art in our life.
Read the text and fill in the blanks with the given words.
Wenwen, Xiaozhi, Yining and Kaibo are in the same 
class, but they have different dream jobs. Wenwen wants 
to be a(n) __________. She likes playing the piano. She 
thinks music can make her happy and relaxed. Xiaozhi 
likes to operate and control electronic things, and he 
wants to be a(n) _________. How about Yining? She 
wants to be a photographer. On holidays, she likes to 
travel with her family and take ____________ of people 
and places. Kaibo wants to be a writer. He likes reading 
__________, especially Lu Xun’s works. They are very 
famous in Chinese ____________. 
Activity  1
Activity  2
Review
photos      novels      engineer      literature     musician
UNIT 2
34
Read the posters and put the sentences (1-- 4) in the correct places.
 Pair work. Read the sentences and change them into exclamatory 
sentences, and then check with your partner.
1.  The dumplings are delicious.
     _________________________________________________ !  (how/what)
2.  His painting is wonderful.
     _________________________________________________ !  (how/what)
3.  He teaches English well.
     _________________________________________________ !  (how/what)
4.  She is an excellent sportswoman. 
     _________________________________________________ !  (how/what)
5.  He is a popular actor. 
     _________________________________________________ !  (how/what)
Activity  3
Activity  4
                                                                 
Want to enjoy exciting music?
                                                                 
SCHOOL CONCERT
Come and join us!
Place: The School Hall
Time: 7:00 p.m. on Nov. 7th
Welcome to Our Music Lessons
Want to become a musician?
                                                  
Want to become happy in life?
Just come and join us!
                                                  
Only ￥60 for each lesson 
Place: Training Room 304, Little
           Star Building 
Time: 8:30 a.m.–9:30 a.m. every
           Sunday 
1.  Want to spend a wonderful evening?
2.  Want to make beautiful music?
3.  Want to see your favorite school singers?
4.  Music lessons (guitar, violin, piano and drum) for you!
UNIT 2
35
Self -assessment
1. How much do you enjoy the topic?
I’m interested in the topic of art.
I love different kinds of art, such as _______________________
____________________________________________________.
2. How well can you use the language and cultural knowledge?
I can use proper sonorization, incomplete plosions and liaisons. 
I can use the vocabulary for/of art.
I can use the indefinite pronouns, adverbs of place/time and 
exclamatory sentences.
I can share my knowledge of art.
3. How well can you use English to perform the activities? 
I can talk about different art forms and art works.
I can understand the texts and recordings in this unit.
I can introduce Chinese folk arts to my classmates.
I can write about my favorite art.
4. How well can you use thinking skills and learning strategies?
I can use a chart to classify details.
I can draw a conclusion in reading.
I can work with my partner(s) in pair/group work.
5. How are you satisfied with your group project?
I can plan for an art festival with my partners.
I can report our project to the class. 
6. How are you going to improve your English learning?
  ____________________________________________________________________ 
  ____________________________________________________________________
UNIT 2
36
Big Question: How do you keep healthy?
In this unit, you will learn to:
 talk about health.
 live a healthy life.
  use a chart to make comparison and contrast.
 use the reading strategy of taking notes.
 make a poster about healthy lifestyles.
UNIT
Sound Body, Sound Mind
Sound Body, Sound Mind
3
A. Match the illnesses (a–f) with the pictures at the top of the next page.
B. Fill in each blank with a suitable illness above.
C.        Pair work. Listen and repeat, and then replace the parts in bold 
     and practice with your partner.
What’s wrong with you?
d. headache
b. fever
a. bad cough
e. toothache
c. sore throat
f. stomachache
Preparing for the Topic
UNIT
3
Activity  1
Listening & Speaking
Illnesses and habits
I just took my temperature. 
I have a fever.
I’m sorry to hear that. You 
need to see a doctor.
1. I just took my temperature. I have a __________. 
2. I have a __________. I need to take some cough medicine.
3. He is coughing and losing his voice. He has a __________.
4. She has a __________. She needs to see the dentist.
5. She stayed up late last night. And now she has a __________.
6. He has a __________ because he ate too much junk food.
UNIT 3
38
Name
Problem
Suggestion
Wang 
Junfeng
1. spends too much time on 
    phone games
2. always feels                     
3. can’t                      himself
1. stay away from phone games
2. go to bed early
3. do more                      
Xiao Ya
1. wants to be slim
2. always feels                     
3. often has a                     
1. have a healthy diet 
2. do some                     
3. needn’t be slim to look                      
Pair work. Discuss whether the following habits are good. If 
not, give your advice. 
Activity  3
Take an active part in doing sports.
Spend too much time on the screen.
Eat too much salt or sugar.
UNIT 3
39
       Listen to the conversation and complete the table.
Activity  2
Reason
Result
Suggestion
ate too much 
junk food 
• feels very __________
• has a ____________
• stop eating _____________________ 
• rest in bed and take some _________
Pair work. Talk about the pictures and guess what’s wrong 
with Li Xiang. 
       Listen to the conversation and answer the question.
       Listen again and complete the table.
Pair work. Talk about more examples of healthy and unhealthy 
habits, and then make up a new conversation.
Doctor:    What’s wrong with you?
Li Xiang: I feel very sick and have a stomachache.
Doctor:    When did you feel the ache?
Li Xiang: About one hour ago. Just after lunch. 
Doctor:    Let me examine you.
(A  few minutes later)
Doctor:    OK. What did you have for lunch?
Li Xiang: I had some hamburgers, chips, fried pork together with some pepper
                 and a cold drink.
Doctor:    I see. You ate too much junk food, especially hot pepper and iced 
                 Coke. It is not healthy at all.  
Li Xiang: Thanks, doctor. I will remember that. 
Doctor:    You need to take a rest and take some pills.
Li Xiang: OK. Thank you.
What does the doctor say about junk food?
Activity  2
Activity  1
Activity  3
Activity  4
Seeing a doctor
Function
UNIT 3
40
1. You look pale. You should see a doctor.
2. In my opinion, fried food is not healthy.
3. Why don’t we go out for a walk after dinner?
4. To keep healthy, we’d better do exercise every day.
camp
stamp
husband
blind
absent
account
task
desk
direct
protect
gift
soft
accept
kept
artist
guest
field
told
herself
shelf
milk
silk
adult
salt
single
little
table
people
middle
uncle
often
listen
lesson
cousin
basin
seven
       Listen and read the words aloud. Pay attention to the 
pronunciation of the blue letters.
       Listen and read the sentences. Pay attention to the liaisons. 
       Listen and chant. Pay attention to the liaisons.
Activity  2
Activity  1
Activity  3
Today is Monday, so I start once more
with my diet like many times before.
This time I’ll make it. I know I can, too.
Because on Sunday I ate all I could chew.
Monday morning I got up out of bed.
For breakfast, I had just one piece of bread.
Later, for lunch, I went out to the store
to buy tomatoes, bananas and more.
My tummy then hurt. I wanted to scream.
I saw some big donuts filled with sweet cream.
One vowel can be 
linked with another 
by adding a slight /j/ or /w/.
TIPS
Pronunciation
Assimilation & Liaison
UNIT 3
41
Read the text and complete the comparison chart.
Look at the pictures and read the text, and then learn how to 
compare and contrast. 
Pair work. Discuss Wenwen’s and Xiaolu’s  eating habits based on 
Activity 2.
Hello, I’m Wenwen. I love fruit and vegetables. I eat at home every day, and I have 
meals with little salt and sugar. My favorite snack is chocolate.
My friend Xiaolu also likes fruit and vegetables. But she often eats hamburgers and 
cookies. Her favorite snack is ice cream.
Pingping and Yining both love sports a lot. 
Pingping is outgoing and she always plays football 
with her friends. Unlike her, Yining is shy. She 
likes running alone. When doing sports, they both 
need to take care of their safety.
Pingping
• outgoing
• always plays football
   with her friends
Wenwen
      
     
Yining
• shy
• likes running alone
Xiaolu
       
      
love sports; need 
to take care of 
their safety
Comparing and contrasting
Exploring the Topic
UNIT
3
Activity  2
Activity  1
Activity  3
When you compare and contrast, you think about how two things are alike and how 
they are different.
Thinking Skills
UNIT 3
42
Read the text and underline more key words.
Read the text in Activity 1 again and complete the notes.
When you’re reading, you can note down the key words to help you understand and 
remember the important information.
Exercise is good for us in many ways. For one thing, it can help build a strong 
body. For example, jogging is good for our legs and hearts. For another, it is a 
good way to rest and relax our minds. That’s why we should do some exercise 
after hours of work or study. So, don’t be lazy. Let’s exercise!
Tips for Doing Sports
When you plan to do exercise, here are some 
tips for you.
Talk with your doctor. He/She can give you 
some advice according to your condition.
Warm up. You need to start slowly with a warm-
up, and then move on step by step.
Drink enough water. Your body needs a lot of 
water, especially on hot days. 
Listen to your body. Take a break or stop right 
away when you feel uncomfortable. 
Taking notes
Read the text and underline the key words, and then take notes.
Activity  3
Activity  2
Activity  1
Notes
Doing exercise is good for us in many ways.
1. It can help _____________________________________________________. 
    e.g., ___________________________________________________________. 
2. It is a good way to _____________________________________________.
    We should _____________________________________________________.
Notes
1. __________
2. __________
3. __________
4. __________
Reading Strategies
UNIT 3
43
Pair work. Look at the pictures and talk about what you often 
do when you feel down.
Read the two web posts. Underline the key information, and 
then complete the notes. 
· 2nd post
Who: ________________________
What: ________________________
Why:  ________________________
How:  ________________________
· 1st post
Who: ________________________
What:________________________
Why:  ________________________
How: ________________________
keep a diary
Activity  2
Activity  1
do sports with friends
listen to music
talk to your parents
I’m an 8th grader. In my opinion, staying positive has 
amazing benefits. I can study and work better in a good 
mood. Here are a few tips to help you.
First, you should exercise more. You can try ball games, 
such as volleyball and football. They will make you feel 
good. Second, you can communicate with more people and you don’t need 
to face bad feelings alone. Last, make sure to get enough sleep. After a good 
sleep, you will be full of energy. It will make you feel excited to start a new 
day.
20:30, March 2nd 
Meimei: 
Theme Reading
Positive attitudes
UNIT 3
44
Read the text again and complete the comparison chart on how 
to stay positive.
Match the words and phrases with their meanings according 
to the text.
positive
thinking about good things
something useful or helpful 
to succeed in doing something
feeling sure of oneself 
to meet or find (something or someone) by chance
benefit
get through
confident
come across
Meimei
● ___________________   
● communicate with   
  others
● ___________________   
Yinuo
● ___________________    
● find the good points
  in ourselves 
● ___________________    
____________________
Activity  3
Activity  4
Hi, Meimei. I am glad to come across your post. I think being 
positive can bring us a lot of benefits. We can become more 
confident and have better chances for success.
How can we stay positive? To start with, I think playing 
sports is one of the ways. I am never absent from the football 
matches in my school. When I am playing football, I am always confident in 
myself. Besides, we need to find the good points in ourselves. To live a happy 
life, we must first love ourselves. Finally, if we do have bad feelings, we can 
write them down. Talking to ourselves is a useful way to get through difficult 
moments.  
19:35, March 4th 
Yinuo:  
UNIT 3
45
dislike      uncomfortable      impossible      nonstop      misplace
impatient           nonsense           uncomfortable           improper
Look at the pictures and 
read the sentences. Pay attention to 
the words in bold. 
Fill in the blanks with the correct form of the given words.
Read the text and fill in the blanks with the words in the box. 
A(n) ____________ habit does a lot of harm to people. For example, staying up late 
is very bad for people’s health. Clearly, they will feel sleepy and ____________ next 
day. What’s worse, people will become ____________ and they may even forget 
important dates. Sometimes, they will talk ____________ because their minds are not 
clear. To get rid of the habit, people need to do some sports and sleep early. A healthy 
body and a clear mind will make them feel good all day. 
1. It is ______________ to keep healthy without good living habits.
2. Don’t eat too much junk food, or you will feel ______________. 
3. She ______________ ice cream because it’s bad for her teeth.
4. My sister’s room is tidy, and she never ______________ her things.
5. We felt very tired after a long and ______________ walk.
Activity  2
Activity  1
Activity  3
The prefixes non-, dis-, un-, mis-, 
in- and im- usually express the 
opposite meanings of the original words.
He became a non-
smoker in order to 
keep healthy.
Hamburgers may 
taste delicious, but it 
is unhealthy to eat 
too many of them.
Seafood may seem
to disagree with 
some people.
It is incorrect to 
do sports with an 
empty stomach.
TIPS
Grammar in Use
Pref ixes non- , dis- , un- , mis- , in- 
and im- 
UNIT 3
46
Need
Example
need to do
We need _____ (get) enough sleep every day.
don’t/doesn’t 
need to do
The girl is getting well and she doesn’t need _____ (take) the 
medicine now. 
needn’t do
Kangkang needn’t ______ (do) the work today. He can hand it 
in tomorrow.
Complete the table and learn how to use need.
Read the sentences and circle the correct words.
Pair work. Read the conversation. Pay attention to need.
Activity  2
Activity  3
Activity  1
What’s the matter 
with you?
You can watch the games online 
next day. You needn’t stay up. You 
need to take care of yourself.
1.  He (need/needs) to take a break now. He looks so tired.
2.  We (need/needn’t) to play sports every day to keep healthy.
3.  You (needn’t/don’t need) store so much food in the fridge. 
4.  You (needn’t/don’t need) to worry about your grades. Just relax. 
5.  Both Maria and Meimei (need/needn’t) to lose weight.
I stayed up to watch the soccer 
game last night. I need to get 
some sleep now.
OK. Thank you 
for your advice.
need to do/don't need to do/needn't do
UNIT 3
47
_________ What should we eat every day?
_________ What food is healthy?
_________ How about potatoes?
_________ Are they unhealthy food? 
_________ Is that okay?
A.       Listen to the conversation and tick the questions you hear.
B.       Listen again and fill in the blanks.
Group work. Match the words with the pictures and discuss if 
Kaibo’s meals are healthy. If not, give your advice.
Developing the Topic
UNIT
3
Activity  1
Activity  2
Kaibo’s meals
Breakfast: sandwich
Lunch: rice with a lot of meat, such as chicken and beef
Dinner: fish, strawberries, ice cream
Snacks: candy, chocolate, biscuits
My advice: ________________________________________________
Oral Communication
Talking about healthy eating 
habits
① ice cream    ② cabbage    ③ tomato    ④ sandwich    ⑤ corn    ⑥ candy
⑦ chicken    ⑧ strawberry    ⑨ beef    ⑩ biscuits    ⑪ rice    ⑫ cucumbers
②
Let’s talk about food and healthy diet.
• _______ and vegetables are healthy. You need to eat them every day.
• Potatoes are good vegetables, but _______ are junk food. 
• Chocolate and _______ are bad for your teeth. You should eat _______
    of them.
• We need to have a glass of milk, _______ and bread for breakfast.
UNIT 3
48
Read the text about two healthy lifestyles and complete the 
chart. 
Activity  2
  What I do
What I eat
do exercise every day
fruit and vegetables
Pair work. Complete the table with what you do or eat to keep 
healthy, and then share with your partner.
Keeping healthy
Activity  1
How Healthy Are You?
I’m Xiao Lin. I have a sister, and her name is 
Xiao Ya. We both live healthy lifestyles. 
We like to play sports and eat good food. I enjoy 
running and playing soccer. I also love fruit, such 
as apples and bananas. My sister, on the other 
hand, prefers swimming and basketball. She likes 
to eat vegetables. Carrots, beans and cucumbers 
are all her favorites. We both have fun staying 
active and eating well. 
Though we choose different sports and food, we 
both care about being healthy. Our lifestyles help 
us stay strong and feel happy.
Reading for Writing
UNIT 3
49
Draw a comparison chart about the lifestyles of yours and your 
friend’s, and then draft your essay. The phrases and sentence patterns 
may help you.
Rate your draft, and then complete your essay. 
Useful phrases
Useful sentence patterns
like to do …
enjoy doing …
prefer doing …
stay active   
I also love …
… are all her favorites.
We both have fun …
Our lifestyles help us stay …
Activity  4
Activity  3
Xiao Lin
 _______________
  _________________
 _______________
  ________________
 _______________
  ________________
Xiao Ya
 _______________
  ________________
 _______________
  ________________
 _______________
  ________________
They both
 _______________ 
 _______________ 
 _______________ 
How well can you ____________________ ?
Self-
rating
Partner’s 
rating
express your view of caring for a healthy lifestyle 
use the thinking skill of making comparison and contrast
write about how to keep healthy and positive
organize ideas into a well-balanced structure
use the theme vocabulary of the unit
use need to/don’t need to/needn’t do
use punctuation
spell the words
1-Needs improvement; 2-Satisfactory; 3-Good; 4-Excellent
Please ask your partner to review your draft for errors and offer suggestions for improvement.
UNIT 3
50
 Pair work. Brainstorm different aspects of a healthy lifestyle. 
Discuss with your partner and write down more ideas in the blanks. 
Group work. Design a poster about a healthy lifestyle.
Report your group work to your class and share your poster 
about how to keep a healthy lifestyle.
Making a poster about a healthy lifestyle
Wrapping Up the Topic
UNIT
3
Activity  2
Activity  1
Activity  3
A Healthy Lifestyle
Do more exercise.
Eat more vegetables and fruit.
Eat more vegetables and fruit.
 Do more exercise.
How to Live a Healthy Life?
Project
UNIT 3
51
       Pair work. Listen to the monologs and fill in the blanks, 
and then discuss the differences between Chinese and British cooking. 
Read the text and fill in the blanks with the correct form of the 
given words.
Differences between Chinese and British Cooking
Chinese cooking is _________.
• Different food needs different cooking methods and _________.
• Chinese cooking focuses on _________, smell and taste.  
• In the north, _________ are popular. In the south, 
   rice is the main food.
British cooking is mostly simple and _________.
• People love easy meals like _________, fruit and drinks.
• They also enjoy dishes with plenty of _________ and
    vegetables.
• They use sauces to make food taste better, and
    _________ are often served as the main food.
How can you stay positive? Here are some tips.
Activity  2
Activity  1
First, always try to smile. Smiling can make you ______ (feel) happy. So, try to smile 
at yourself and the people around you. Second, keep a _______ (health) lifestyle. 
Keep away from unhealthy food and take an active part in exercise every day. 
Third, make a clear plan and _______ (enjoy) your classes. As a student, you have 
many classes. Love your classes, and you can do a great job. Fourth, take up a 
hobby. You can do an activity to relax, such as reading, _________ (learn) a new 
sport and spending time with your pet. Fifth, be patient with everything. To be in a 
hurry can make you mad ________ (easy).
Review
UNIT 3
52
need            don’t need            need to            don’t need to/needn’t 
Read the text and answer the questions.
Fill in the blanks with a suitable form of need in the box.
To stay fit and healthy, kids __________ do physical activity every day. They can 
play sports, ride bikes, or just run around with their friends. They __________ spend 
hours in the gym; even 30 minutes of active play each day can make a difference. 
Also, kids __________ eat a balanced diet of fruit, vegetables, meat and fish. While 
they may enjoy chocolates and chips, they __________ candy or junk food to grow. 
Finally, a good night’s sleep is also important. Kids __________ 9 to 12 hours of 
sleep each night for their health. With these good habits, kids __________ worry 
about their health as they grow tall and strong.
1. What is Parkrun?
    _______________________________________________________________
2. When and where did Parkrun start?
    _______________________________________________________________
3. How long is each Parkrun event?
    _______________________________________________________________
4. Who can join Parkrun?
    _______________________________________________________________
5. Do you like Parkrun? Why or why not? 
    _______________________________________________________________
Activity  3
Activity  4
Parkrun is a fun and exciting way for people to run or walk in parks every week. 
It started in 2004 when a group of friends wanted to have a running event in 
London, England. They wanted to make running fun and friendly for everyone. 
The first event had only a few runners, but many people liked it. Soon, Parkrun 
grew and spread to many other countries. Now, thousands of people join every 
Saturday to run or walk the 5-kilometer course. 
Parkrun welcomes everyone, no matter how fast 
or slow they are. It is free, and people can bring 
their family and friends to enjoy the fresh air 
together. Parkrun is about getting active, having 
fun, and making new friends.
UNIT 3
53
Self -assessment
1. How much do you enjoy the topic?
I’m interested in the topic of health.
I always try to keep healthy and stay positive, and I need to ____
____________________________________________________.
2. How well can you use the language and cultural knowledge?
I can use proper assimilations and liaisons.
I can use the vocabulary for/of keeping healthy.
I can use the prefixes non-/dis-/un-/mis-/in-/im- and need to do/
don’t need to do/needn’t do. 
I can understand and learn how to live a healthy life.
3. How well can you use English to perform the activities? 
I can talk about different illnesses and habits.
I can understand the texts and recordings in this unit.
I can discuss healthy eating habits with my partners.
I can write about keeping healthy.
4. How well can you use thinking skills and learning strategies?
I can use a chart to make comparison and contrast.
I can take notes in reading.
I can work with my partner(s) in pair/group work.
5. How are you satisfied with your group project?
I can make a poster about healthy lifestyles with my partners.
I can report our project to the class. 
6. How are you going to improve your English learning?
  ____________________________________________________________________ 
  ____________________________________________________________________
UNIT 3
54
Big Question: How do you deal with changes? 
In this unit, you will learn to:
 talk about growing up.
 understand and deal with growing pains.
  use a chart to understand character development.
 use the strategy of reading with a purpose.
 share your growing-up stories.
Changing and Growing
Changing and Growing
UNIT
4
A. Match the words (a–e) with the pictures at the top of the next page.
B. Fill in each blank with a suitable word above.
C.        Pair work. Listen and repeat, and then replace the parts in bold
      and practice with your partner.
Why do you look upset?
Why not take a deep breath 
and smell something good? 
And then you will feel relaxed.
I’m feeling nervous about 
tomorrow’s speech.
e. touch
d. smell
b. hearing
a. vision
 c. taste
Activity  1
Preparing for the Topic
UNIT
4
Listening & Speaking
Senses and stress control
______ 1. When I feel tired, I often wash my face with cold water.
______ 2. I like listening to soft music. The music makes me feel calm. 
______ 3. What a fool I was to taste hot pepper! I really regretted doing that. 
______ 4. I will never forget seeing so many world-famous paintings in the
                 museum.
______ 5. The flowers smelt so good! I took a deep breath and the smell made
                  me relaxed.
UNIT 4
56
       Listen to the conversations and fill in the blanks.
Group work. Consider the following situations and discuss 
what you usually do to reduce your stress.
How do 
we sense?
I have the flu. I can’t go out. 
I can’t visit my grandparents 
and I can’t see my friends. I 
feel ________. What should 
I do?
20″
Me, too. I do some _______ 
and drawing to help me feel 
better. You can have a try!
12″
I feel so happy. It’s the Spring 
Festival in Chinatown today. 
I _______ the fireworks and 
I got a red packet from a shop 
keeper. Lucky!
How much lucky money did you get?
18″
_______ yuan.
2″
3″
Activity  2
Activity  3
give a speech
feel lonely in a new school
prepare for an exam
UNIT 4
57
Pair work. Look at the pictures and talk about the boy’s feelings. 
       Listen to the conversation and answer the question. 
       Listen again and complete the table.
Pair work. Suppose you are Lingling and your partner is Li Hong. 
Make up a new conversation and act it out.
Miss Wang: Hi, Li Hong! You look sad. What’s the problem?
Li Hong:      Hi, Miss Wang. I failed the English exam. 
Miss Wang: Don’t worry. You can do better next time.
Li Hong:      Thanks. But what should I do? Can you give me some suggestions?
Miss Wang: If you have any problem, you can always come to me. 
Li Hong:      Thank you very much, Miss Wang. And you know, I moved here
                     a month ago. I miss my friends in my hometown. They often helped 
                     me with my English.
Miss Wang: That’s all right. You can keep in touch with them and make new
                      friends here. 
Li Hong:      I guess so. But I don’t know how to start. 
Miss Wang: Well, Lingling is nice, and her English is very good. I can
                      recommend her to you. I’m sure she would like to be your friend. 
Li Hong:      Thanks for your help, Miss Wang.
What is Li Hong talking about with Miss Wang?
push
can’t find his cat
have fun with friends
see a snake
Problem
Suggestion
Activity  1
Activity  2
Activity  3
Activity  4
• can go to Miss Wang for ___________ 
• can _____________ with Lingling
• ___________ the English exam 
• has no _____________ here
Li Hong’s problems at school
Function
UNIT 4
58
        Listen and chant. Pay attention to the rhythms.
The 'north winds 'blow.
And we shall have 'snow.
And 'what will the 'poor Robin 'do then?
'Poor 'thing.
He’ll 'sit in a 'barn.
And 'keep himself 'warm.
And 'hide his 'head 'under his 'wing.
'Poor 'thing!
Pronunciation
Activity  3
        Listen and read the sentences. Mark the stresses in each 
sentence. 
Activity  2
Example: She is a 'teacher. 
1. She must be excited.  
2. I am glad to make many new friends.
3. My sister will become a middle school student.
4. There are big changes in body and mind at different ages. 
        Listen and read the sentences aloud. Pay attention to the 
rhythms.
Activity  1
The rhythm is based 
on the units of strong 
and weak forms. We read the 
stressed units clearly and the 
unstressed ones quickly.
TIPS
Rhythm & Stress
1. Time and tide wait for no man.  
2. All in his mind is fight or flight.
3. I will not make the same mistake again.
4. An apple a day keeps the doctor away.
UNIT 4
59
Look at the pictures and read the text, and then think about 
how and why the character changes. 
Read the text and analyze how and why the character changes, 
and then complete the character-development chart.
Pair work. Talk about how and why the character changes 
based on Activity 2.
Li Hong became our new classmate a month ago. In the beginning, she was always 
lonely because she didn’t have any friends. Miss Wang, our English teacher, then 
introduced her to Lingling. Lingling was very good at English and helped Li Hong a 
lot. They soon became very close friends. Now, Li Hong has many friends at school 
and gets along well with us. She enjoys her school life very much.
Beginning
Kangkang lost the 
100-meter race and 
was very upset.
Beginning
Li Hong didn’t 
have any friends 
and __________
_____________.
Middle
His friend, Li Ming, 
came up to him and 
cheered him up.
Middle
Miss Wang _______ 
_____________ and 
they soon became 
very close friends.
End
Kangkang laughed 
again and walked 
with Li Ming 
happily. 
End
Li Hong has many 
friends at school 
and enjoys ______
__________.
Exploring the Topic
UNIT
4
Understanding character development
Activity  1
Activity  2
Activity  3
Characters grow and change in the story. You can understand character development 
by analyzing how and why a character changes.
Thinking Skills
UNIT 4
60
Read the beginning part of a text and set a purpose for reading.
Read a sentence from the same text and decide whether the 
information is important or unimportant for your reading purpose.
Read the text and set a reading purpose first, and then decide 
whether the information is important or not for your purpose.
Good readers set a purpose for reading. While reading, they can decide what is important 
and what is not for the reading purpose.
The period of time from age 13 to 19 is a very important stage of human life. Many 
important life changes take place during this teenage stage.
As a teenager, you also have growing pains. You face problems like schoolwork stress, 
pressure from other people and so on. Then, how can you deal with the growing pains? 
Firstly, learn to listen and understand. This can help you learn more about life and people 
around you. Secondly, make friends with your classmates. Your friends may have the 
same problem as yours, so you can always understand and help each other. Lastly, don’t 
compare yourself with others. Everyone shines in their own ways. You should discover 
and develop your own strong points. 
As teenagers grow in age, their bodies reach their full adult height. This is the clearest 
change. Also, hair grows on certain areas of their bodies, and their voices change too.
Your reading purpose is to find out ___________________________.
Your reading purpose is to find out ____________________________.
1. Teenagers grow in age.
Important/Unimportant
2. Their bodies reach their full adult height.
Important/Unimportant
3. Hair grows on certain areas of their bodies, and
    their voices change too.
Important/Unimportant
1. You also have growing pains.
Important/Unimportant
2. Learn to listen and understand.
Important/Unimportant
3. Make friends with your classmates.
Important/Unimportant
4. Don’t compare yourself with others.
Important/Unimportant
Reading with a purpose
Activity  1
Activity  2
Activity  3
Reading Strategies
UNIT 4
61
Pair work. Talk about the following questions.
Read the email and answer the questions.
  What is your reading purpose for the email?
  Are the following details important or unimportant for the purpose?
    1. Last October, I signed up for a music club.               (Important/Unimportant)
    2. Mrs. Zhang advised me to have a talk with my parents. (Important/Unimportant)
    3. My parents finally understood my love for music.     (Important/Unimportant)
1. Did you have any happy or sad memories in junior high school? What were they?
2. When you met some troubles at school, how did you solve them?
Activity  1
Activity  2
Dear Uncle Wang,
How time flies! Congratulations on moving to your new house! How’s 
everything going in London? So many things took place in my past school year. 
Last October, I signed up for a music club. I felt so lucky to make some good 
friends there. The music teacher, Mrs. Zhang, helped me improve my singing 
skills. But my parents didn’t allow me to learn singing. They said, “It is a waste 
of time.” I was disappointed and didn’t know what to do. When Mrs. Zhang 
learnt about this, she advised me to have an open and honest talk with my 
parents. I gathered my courage to talk to them. After that, my parents started to 
understand my love for music. Two weeks ago, they even came to cheer me on. 
I was very glad to have their support. 
But here is the problem. I can’t spare much time for my study because of the 
singing activities. What should I do? Any advice?
Yours,
Li Xiang
From:
Li Xiang
To:
Uncle Wang
Reply Forward
Theme Reading
Li Xiang’s past school year
UNIT 4
62
Read the text again and complete the character-development 
chart.
Beginning
• He signed up for
  a music club and
  made some good
  friends there.
• He felt ________
  ______________.
Middle
• ______________
______________
______________
• ______________
______________
______________
End
• ______________
______________
______________
• ______________
______________
______________
Activity  3
Group work. Read the text again and discuss how to help Li 
Xiang to solve his problem.
 Li Xiang’s problem
Your suggestion
He can’t spare much time for his study 
because of the singing activities.
1. plan everything well
2. ...
Activity  5
Complete the sentences with the words or phrases from the text.
Activity  4
1. Li Xiang wrote to Uncle Wang for help because he had ________.
2. Li Xiang signed up for a music club last October to ________ his singing skills.
3. Li Xiang’s parents didn’t allow Li Xiang to ________ singing because they 
    thought it was ________.
4. Li Xiang was ________ and didn’t know what to do.
5. After an open and ________ talk, Li Xiang was glad to receive his parents’ support.
UNIT 4
63
Complete the text and fill in the blanks. 
Youth is an important period of time for growing up. It can be hard and __________, 
but you grow in every way and learn more about life. Sometimes, you may feel 
___________. But your teachers are always there for you, and your friends can 
also be ___________. Some people may say something __________ to you, but 
they might not mean it, and you can talk to them and learn to communicate with 
people. Maybe, you find some subjects difficult and __________. However, you will 
understand the true value of knowledge later on. In a word, youth is a __________ 
experience. You should make the most of it.
aimless       helpful        hurtful       painful       priceless       useless
Activity  2
Look at the pictures and read the sentences. Pay attention to 
the words in bold.
Complete the sentences with the correct form of the given words.
1. Li Hong was _______ (joy) because she got a good grade in the exam. 
2. After years of hard work, my uncle became ________ (success) and now he lives
    an easy and comfortable life.  
3. You were doing very well yesterday. Be ________ (hope) and you’ll succeed.  
4. He learned a lot after visiting many _______ (wonder) places. 
5. Smoking is _______ (harm). No one should smoke in public. 
The doctor feels helpless 
to save the patient’s 
life. He wishes he could 
be more helpful.
The symbols are very 
useful to pay online, 
but they are useless 
without a cellphone.
Your boss doesn’t allow 
any careless mistakes, 
so you’d better be very 
careful in your work.
Activity  1
Activity  3
Suf f ixes -less and -ful
Grammar in Use
UNIT 4
64
Positive form
Negative form
I
was
helping Xiao Ya 
with her mood 
problem at 7:00 
p.m. yesterday.
He
wasn’t
helping Xiao Ya with her 
mood problem at 7:00 p.m. 
yesterday.
They
____
You
_____
Question form
______
she
helping Xiao Ya with her 
mood problem at 10:00 
a.m. yesterday?
Yes, she ______./No, she ______.
Were
they
Yes, they ______./No, they ______.
Complete the table and learn how to use the past continuous 
tense.
Pair work. Look at the pictures and talk about what people were 
doing at 9:00 a.m. yesterday.
Pair work. Read the conversation. Pay attention to was/were doing. 
What were you doing at 
this time yesterday?
A: What was he/she doing?/What were they doing?
B: He/She was …/They were …
tidy up the bathroom
jog
write a postcard
ride bikes
Activity  1
Activity  2
Activity  3
Yes. We felt moved when 
we were watching it.
I was watching a movie 
with my parents.
The past continuous tense
What movie were you 
watching? Is it My 
Country and My People?
UNIT 4
65
1. Which is Mike’s favorite band?
2. What does Jameson do? 
3. What was Mike doing in the bedroom?
A.         Listen to the drama and tick the correct answers.
B.        Listen again and match the adjectives with the sentences.
Group work. Discuss your problems of growing up and solutions 
to them. The following questions may help you.
1. What problems did you have?
2. How did you feel at first?
3. What did you do to deal with the problems? 
4. How did you feel in the end?
The band will hold a concert in the town.
Jameson is Mike’s friend, and he will help Mike to get a ticket.
Mike’s dad bought tickets for Mike.
exciting
happy
crazy
surprised
Mike’s dad saw the band ten years ago.
a
b
c
a
b
c
a
b
c
Talking about problems of 
growing up and solutions 
to them
Activity  1
Developing the Topic
UNIT
4
Activity  2
Oral Communication
UNIT 4
66
Pair work. Discuss the order of the sentences and read the text 
in Activity 2 to check. 
Read the text about Li Mei’s growing-up story and complete the 
chart. 
Growing in the past year
Activity  1
Activity  2
I often argued with my parents for nothing.
Little by little, I became more confident.
During my 8th grade, I went through many changes.
Now, I don’t worry about my weight anymore. 
Luckily, my elder sister, Zhenzhen, noticed how I was feeling. 
Accept Yourself and Share Your Feelings
My name is Li Mei. Today, I want to share my story of growing up.
During my 8th grade, I went through many changes. As I was 
growing taller, I was gaining weight quickly. This made me 
feel bad about myself, and I often argued with my parents for 
nothing. At times, I was really feeling lonely and unhappy.
Luckily, my elder sister, Zhenzhen, noticed how I was feeling. 
She was always there to listen. With her support, I started to 
talk about my feelings. Little by little, I became more confident, 
and my relationship with my parents also improved.
Being a teenager is not easy, but I learned to accept myself and 
share my feelings. Now, I don’t worry about my weight anymore. 
Instead, I feel happy every day!
Reading for Writing
UNIT 4
67
Draw a character-development chart of your growing-up story, 
and then draft your essay. The phrases and sentence patterns may help you. 
Rate your draft, and then complete your essay. 
Useful phrases
Useful sentence patterns
feel … about … 
argue with …
try to do …
no longer
I want to tell …  
To become a(n) …
Little by little, …
I’m no longer …
Activity  3
Activity  4
Middle
• ______________
______________
______________
• ______________
______________
End
• ______________
______________
______________
• ______________
______________
Beginning
• ______________
______________
______________
• ______________
______________
How well can you ____________________ ?
Self-
rating
Partner’s 
rating
express your view of knowing yourself
use the thinking skill of describing a character
write about your growing-up story
 
organize ideas into a well-balanced structure
use the theme vocabulary of the unit
use the past continuous tense
use punctuation
spell the words
Please ask your partner to review your draft for errors and offer suggestions for improvement.
1-Needs improvement; 2-Satisfactory; 3-Good; 4-Excellent
UNIT 4
68
Pair work. Look at the pictures and talk about Meimei’s 
growing pains. 
Group work. Draw some pictures to tell a story about your growing 
pains. Give the story a proper title and share it with your group members.
Report your group work to your class and share your story about 
growing pains.
Sharing your story of growing pains
Wrapping Up the Topic
UNIT
4
Activity  1
Activity  3
Activity  2
Meimei failed her 
math exam again. 
Her mom was very 
angry with her.
Meimei’s dad joined 
them. They were 
discussing Meimei’s 
problems.
Meimei’s mom was 
hugging her, and 
her dad looked 
very happy. 
After Failing an Exam
Project
Put your pictures here.
UNIT 4
69
        Pair work. Listen to the conversation and complete the 
table, and then talk about their opinions.
Read the letter and fill in the blanks with the correct form of the 
words in the box. 
Dear Lingling,
How is everything going in your school? I hope you __________ 
everything at your new school. 
Well, I’m writing to ask you for some _________. I’m going to have an 
exam soon, just as you _________ last year. However, I didn’t spend 
much time _________ my lessons, because I was really busy with my 
robot club. Now I know the exam is really important, but I am at a loss. 
What should I do? I hope I can _________ your letter soon. 
Yours,
Qingyun
Activity  1
Activity  2
advice               receive               enjoy               review               do
Review
Xiao Ya’s opinion
Mom’s opinion
I look ________ in my new dress.
You look ________!
My friend Li Hong has beautiful 
________ legs.
Everyone is ________!
Be yourself and everyone will think 
you are beautiful.
I will wear the dress at Xiaoxiao’s 
________ party.
You’re good at math and you are a 
good runner. You are beautiful in your 
________ way.
UNIT 4
70
Pair work. Look at the pictures and make conversations with 
was/were doing.
Read the letter and answer the questions.
1. How can Lingling make a good study plan? 
    ___________________________________________________________________
2. Why does she need to find time for fun?
    ___________________________________________________________________
3. Who can she turn to when she has problems?
    ___________________________________________________________________
4. What suggestions do you have for Lingling?
    ___________________________________________________________________
Dear Lingling,
I am glad to hear from you. I understand your problem of planning school 
life. When I was your age, I was experiencing similar challenges. Here are my 
suggestions for you.
First, make a study plan. Write down what you need to do each day and try to follow 
it. This will help you manage your time and avoid falling behind. Next, find time 
for fun. A good balance of studying and fun will make school life more exciting 
and colorful. Lastly, don’t be afraid to ask for help. If you have any problems, talk 
to your teachers or classmates. They are always ready to help you.
I hope these suggestions are helpful. Let me know if you need more advice!
Yours, 
Emma
have an art lesson 
listen to music
ride bikes
have fun with friends
do one’s homework
Activity  3
Activity  4
A: Were you having an art lesson 
     from 3 p.m. to 5 p.m. yesterday?
B: No, I was having it from 10 a.m. to 
     12 p.m.
UNIT 4
71
Self -assessment
1. How much do you enjoy the topic?
I’m interested in the topic of growing up.
I always try to deal with the changes in growing up, and I often
 ___________________________________________________.
2. How well can you use the language and cultural knowledge?
I can use proper rhythms and stresses.    
I can use the vocabulary for/of growing up.
I can use the suffixes -less/-ful and past continuous tense.
I can understand pains in growing and deal with them properly. 
3. How well can you use English to perform the activities? 
I can talk about my senses and how to reduce stress.
I can understand the texts and recordings in this unit.
I can discuss problems of growing up and solutions to them.
I can write about my growing-up story.
4. How well can you use thinking skills and learning strategies?
I can understand character development.
I can read with a purpose.
I can work with my partner(s) in pair/group work.
5. How are you satisfied with your group project?
I can share my growing-up stories with my partners.
I can report our project to the class. 
6. How are you going to improve your English learning?
  ____________________________________________________________________ 
  ____________________________________________________________________
UNIT 4
72
Big Question: Why do we go around the world？
In this unit, you will learn to:
 introduce amazing places.
 enjoy the beauty of world-famous places.
  use a chart to distinguish facts from opinions.
 use the reading strategy of making inferences.
 make a poster about a world-famous landmark. 
Amazing Places
Amazing Places
UNIT
5
A. Match the places (a–g) with the pictures at the top of the next page.
B. Fill in each blank with a suitable place of interest above. 
C.        Pair work. Listen and repeat, and then replace the parts in bold 
      and practice with your partner.
It lies in the south of 
Anhui Province.
Where is it?
1. _______________ is famous for its sea of clouds. It lies in the south of Anhui Province.
2. Japan lies in the east of Asia. ________________ is the highest mountain in Japan.
3. ________________ runs from the west to the east in northern China. It starts from 
   Shanhaiguan and ends at Jiayuguan.
4. ________________ lies in the center of Beijing. Tens of thousands of people come
    here to see the national flag-raising ceremony every morning. 
5. People built ____________ for the 2008 Beijing Olympics. It is in the south of the
    central area of Beijing Olympic Park.
6. London is in the south-east of England. The world-famous ___________ is there.
7. ________________ is on the Niagara River. It is in the north-east of North America.
b. Big Ben
e. Mount Fuji
a. Bird’s Nest
d. Niagara Falls
c. the Great Wall
f. Tian’anmen Square
g. Mount Huangshan
Preparing for the Topic
UNIT
5
Activity  1
Which place do you plan to 
visit during your holiday?
I plan to visit 
Mount Huangshan.
Listening & Speaking
Landmarks in the world
UNIT 5
74
        Listen to the text and fill in the blanks.
Pair work. Talk about a place you would like to visit during your 
holiday.
Activity  2
Activity  3
It’s ________ o’clock in the morning now. We are walking on Tian’anmen 
Square. It’s so large. It’s ________ meters long from the north to the south and 
________ meters wide from the east to the west. It’s cold and ________ out 
here, yet it’s quite crowded already. We are getting excited. It’s going to begin 
in 20 minutes. We can’t ________ to see the national flag going up. 
UNIT 5
75
Fujian Tulou
Location south-west Fujian
Length 
over 120 km
Height
10-- 20 meters 
Buildings
46
Shape
round/square 
Capacity
800 people 
for one building
The Palace Museum
Location
Area
Palaces
Length
Rooms
Width
Pair work. Look at the picture and read the table. Talk about 
Fujian Tulou.
        Listen to the conversation and answer the question.
        Listen again and complete the table.
Group work. Talk about the Palace Museum based on  Activity 3. 
Li Xiang:    Kangkang, what are you looking at? 
Kangkang: Oh, some photos of the Palace Museum. 
Li Xiang:    Can I have a look, please? 
Kangkang: Sure. Here you are. 
Li Xiang:    Wow, they are so beautiful. 
Kangkang: Yes, there are more than 70 palaces in different sizes, and they are 
                    all buildings made of wood. 
Li Xiang:   How amazing! It’s said that there are about 9,000 rooms. Is that true? 
Kangkang: Yes. The Palace Museum covers a very large area, more than 
                    720,000 square meters. It is 961 meters long from the north to the
                    south, and 753 meters wide from the east to the west. 
Li Xiang:    I really want to visit the Palace Museum some day. 
Kangkang: What about this National Day holiday? There will be some 
                    interesting activities there.     
Li Xiang:    Good idea! Let’s ride our bikes there.
Kangkang: OK. It is in the center of Beijing, not very far from here. 
Activity  1
Activity  2
Activity  3
Activity  4
What are Li Xiang and Kangkang talking about?
The Palace Museum
Function
UNIT 5
76
Look at the pictures and read the words. Pay attention to the 
sounds and stresses. 
        Listen and read the sentences. 
Pay attention to the sense groups and pauses.
        Listen and read the sentences. Pay attention to the sense 
groups and pauses in the sentences.
1. Hangzhou / is beautiful. 
2. Mount Taishan / lies in Shandong Province.
3. The Potala Palace / has a history / of  about 1,300 years. 
4. As we know, / the Palace Museum / is the greatest palace / in China. 
5. In Paris, / the capital of France, / the Eiffel Tower / is a popular tourist site. 
2. The West Lake / lies in / Hangzhou City.
    The West Lake / lies in / the west of / Hangzhou City.
    The West Lake / lies in / the west of / Hangzhou City, / Zhejiang Province.
1. It may be / a perfect choice.
    The Honghe Hani Rice Terraces / may be a perfect choice. 
    The Honghe Hani Rice Terraces / in Yunnan Province / may be a perfect choice.
'Baiyang 'Lake
'Mount 'Taishan
'Mount 'Qomo'langma
the 'Palace Mu'seum
the 'Honghe 'Hani 'Rice 
'Terraces
Pronunciation
Activity  1
Activity  2
Activity  3
In an English 
sentence, we often 
pause when we see a comma 
or finish a sense group.
TIPS
the 'Eiffel 'Tower
Sense group & Pause
UNIT 5
77
Read the text and complete the fact-and-opinion chart.
Group work. Discuss the West Lake based on Activity 2.
Baiyang Lake is famous for its beautiful lotus flowers. 
During the flower season, the lake is like a huge lotus 
garden. People can take boats to enjoy the flowers. Baiyang 
Lake is also rich in culture. There are many places of cultural 
interest for tourists to see. For example, Gazi Village. 
The West Lake lies in Hangzhou City, Zhejiang Province. It is 3.3 kilometers long, 2.8 
kilometers wide and 2.5 meters deep on average. As a Chinese saying goes, “Heaven 
above, Suzhou and Hangzhou below”. There is always something to see and it is 
beautiful all year round. As for the beautiful landscapes, the Broken Bridge is a must-see. 
To explore the lake, travelers can take boats, ride bicycles or just walk around it. 
1. People can take boats to enjoy
    the flowers.
2. There are many places of cultural 
    interest for tourists to see.
1. Baiyang Lake is famous for its 
    beautiful lotus flowers.
2. During the flower season, the 
    lake is like a huge lotus garden.
Facts 
Facts 
Opinions
Opinions
Distinguishing facts from opinions
Exploring the Topic
UNIT
5
Look at the picture and read the text, and then learn to distinguish 
facts from opinions by using a chart.
Activity  2
Activity  3
Activity  1
A fact is something you can check true or false. An opinion is what someone thinks 
or feels.
Thinking Skills
UNIT 5
78
Pronoun
What it refers to
it  
Beijing National Stadium
its 
the stadium’s
Read the text and learn how to make inferences about pronouns. 
Read the text. Underline the pronouns first, and then make 
inferences about them. 
Read the next part of the text and make inferences about the 
underlined pronouns.
In a sentence, pronouns replace nouns. To fully understand the sentence, you need to 
make inferences about what the pronouns refer to.
Beijing National Stadium is a landmark of Beijing. 
People also call it Bird’s Nest, because its shape is 
just like a nest.
The stadium is 333 meters long from the north to the south and 296 meters wide from 
the east to the west. A large stadium like this is very difficult to build. To make it 
strong and light as well, we built the whole stadium with a strong new material. No 
other structure in the world was built with so much of this new material before. 
The Sydney Opera House is surely the best place 
to see the performing arts. It is also known for the 
beautiful design of its buildings. The buildings 
look like boats sailing on the sea. People can enjoy 
wonderful music in the Concert Hall and the Opera 
Theater. They can also have an unforgettable 
experience after dining in Bennelong Restaurant.
Making inferences 
Activity  1
Activity  2
Activity  3
Pronoun
What it refers to
this
it
Reading Strategies
UNIT 5
79
Pair work. Look at the pictures and talk about the questions. 
The words and phrases in the box may help you.
 Read the text and infer what the underlined pronouns refer to.
Are you looking for a lovely place to spend your vacation? The Honghe Hani 
Rice Terraces in Yunnan may be a good choice. 
With mountains and clouds, this special landscape looks like a beautiful Chinese 
painting. The color of the terraces changes from green to yellow at different 
times of the year. In ancient times, the Hani people developed a watering 
project. Today, it still helps them bring water from the forests to fields. To make 
better use of these water-filled rice fields, farmers raise fish and ducks in them. 
Near the terraces, there are many houses with three floors in the villages. The 
first floor is for pigs and other animals, the second is a living area and the top 
floor is for storing rice.
The lively landscape is really beautiful. How do you like it? Feel free to leave us 
any message below! 
1. What’s special about the places?
2. Which picture do you prefer? Why?
Activity  1
Activity  2
Pronoun
What it refers to
it
them
Theme Reading
Honghe Hani Rice Terraces in Yunnan
water rice field     farming     landscape      special      beautiful      colorful 
UNIT 5
80
 Match the words with their meanings according to the text.
landscape                       a time early in history 
ancient                            to take care of a person, an animal or a plant
raise                                to keep something for future use
store                               a view of the countryside
Activity  3
Read the sentences and tick F (Fact) or O (Opinion).
Read the text again and complete the diagram.
1. The Honghe Hani Rice Terraces may be a perfect choice for vacation.          ( F/O )
2. With mountains and clouds, this unusual landscape looks like a beautiful 
    Chinese painting.                                                                                              ( F/O )
3. The color of the terraces changes from green to yellow at different times of the year.
                                                                                                                                  ( F/O )
4. Farmers raise fish and ducks in the water-filled rice fields.                              ( F/O )
5. It is really beautiful.                                                                                       ( F/O )
Activity  5
Activity  4
◎ The landscape looks like a Chinese __________.
◎ The color of the terraces changes from __________ to
      __________.
○ The first floor is for __________ and __________.
○ The second floor is a living area. 
○ The top floor is for __________.
◎ The watering project brings water from the
     __________ to fields. 
◎ Farmers raise fish and __________ in the 
     water-filled rice fields.
◎ There are many houses with three floors in
     the villages. 
Near the terraces 
The watering system 
Honghe Hani Rice Terraces in Yunnan 
Features
UNIT 5
81
I got a new job 
today. It’s my 
lucky day!
It was a sunny day.
We visited the West 
Lake.
Look at the pictures and read the sentences. Pay attention to 
the words in bold. 
Pair work. Talk about the pictures and use the words in the 
box to make sentences.
Read the text and fill in the blanks with the correct form of the 
given words. 
The Leaning Tower of Pisa is a bell tower. It stands in Pisa, 
Italy. From 1990 to 2001, the engineers fixed its ________ 
(shake) base. Now, the tower is firm. Every year, many 
tourists come to see this ________ (dream) tower. They 
take pictures in front of the tower on ________ (rain) days 
and ________ (sun) days. It is ________ (fun) to see that 
many of them lean to one side just like the leaning tower. 
A healthy diet is 
helpful for you to 
keep fit.
Activity  1
Activity  2
Activity  3
The traffic is heavy 
because it is rainy.
smoky          windy          salty          icy          sleepy          woody         
Grammar in Use
The suff ix -y
UNIT 5
82
Complete the table and learn how to use the infinitive to do.
 Read the letter and fill in the blanks with the correct form of 
the given words.
Pair work. Read the conversation. Pay attention to the infinitive 
to do.
Activity  1
Activity  2
Activity  3
Where do you plan to 
spend your holiday?
Can you help me (to) take 
some photos of the mountain?
1     0      0     0     8      0
Usage
Positive: to do
Negative: not to do
As an object
They wanted _______ (have) a 
rest after a long walk. 
I decided _______ (not go) there. 
As an object 
complement
The host and hostess expect us 
_______ (arrive) on time.
The teacher warns the students 
_______ (not swim) in the river.
As an adverbial 
of purpose 
We started our journey early 
_______ (avoid) the bad traffic.
They got up early in order _______
(not miss) the bus. 
Mount Huangshan.
Dear Li Wei,
How are you?
I have some great news ______ (tell) you. Next month, I’m going to visit 
Mount Huangshan. I plan ______ (take) the train and ______ (book) a train 
ticket and a hotel room online.
But now I don’t have enough money. In order ______ (not be) short of money, 
I’ll take Xiao Ya’s advice ______ (make) money by selling flowers.
How will you spend your holiday? I’m looking forward to hearing from you. 
Yours,
Lingling
The infinitive to do
No problem. Where are 
you going?
I’ll go to the beach to spend my 
holiday with my grandparents.
UNIT 5
83
A.        Listen to the interview. Mark L for Lake Hillier and Y for Yangshuo.
B.        Listen again and complete the table.
Group work. Discuss one of your unforgettable trips with your 
group members. The following questions may help you.
Kangkang’s Trips
Where is it?
Lake Hillier is in the 
_______ of Australia.
Yangshuo is in the _______
 of Guangxi.
How did he get there?
By plane.
By ___________.
What did he see?
He saw both the _______ 
lake and the blue ocean.
He saw many hills in shapes 
of ________ on both sides 
of the river.
Developing the Topic
UNIT
5
Activity  1
Activity  2
1. It’s famous for its color.
2. The special geography makes it beautiful.
3. Food there is delicious.
4. It’s next to the Indian Ocean.
1. Where did you go?
2. Who did you go with?
3. How did you get there?
4. What did you see?
5. How did you feel about the trip?
Oral Communication
Talking about an unforgettable 
trip
You can pause 
briefly before 
conjunctions such as 
and, but, because, etc.
TIPS
UNIT 5
84
Pair work. Talk about the questions and write down the answers.
An amazing place
Activity  1
Read the text about the Great Wall and complete the chart.
Activity  2
1. What amazing places do you know?
2. Which of the places above is your favorite?
3. What do you know about the place?
The Great Wall 
When you open a map of China, you are sure to see a line 
across the northern China. It’s one of the most amazing 
wonders of the world. People call it the Great Wall of China. 
For thousands of years, the Great Wall stood there to keep 
out “enemies” from the north. Workers in ancient times 
used earth and stones to build the wall. To help soldiers 
quickly send messages, the ancient people designed some 
watchtowers on the wall. This shows the wisdom and hard 
work of the Chinese people. What’s more, the wall is also 
important for trade. It protected trading routes such as the 
Silk Road.
Today, you can see the Great Wall of China in movies, 
books and even on people’s T-shirts. It is not only a place 
of interest but also a symbol of the nation.
Reading for Writing
UNIT 5
85
Draw a fact-and-opinion chart about an amazing place and draft 
your essay. The phrases and sentence patterns may help you.
Rate your draft, and then complete your essay. 
Useful phrases
Useful sentence patterns
be sure to ...
in ancient times  
be important for ...
a symbol of ...
It’s one of the most ...
You can see ... 
What’s more, ... 
It is not only a ..., but a ...
Activity  3
Activity  4
1. ___________________________
2. ___________________________
3. ___________________________
1. ___________________________
2. ___________________________
3. ___________________________
Facts 
Opinions
How well can you ____________________ ?
Self-
rating
Partner’s 
rating
express your view of cultural self-confidence
use the thinking skill of distinguishing facts from opinions
introduce an amazing place
organize ideas into a well-balanced structure
use the theme vocabulary of the unit
use the infinitive to do
use punctuation
spell the words
After writing your 
passage, you can ask 
your partner or friend to read it 
and make corrections.
TIPS
Please ask your partner to review your draft for errors and offer suggestions for improvement.
1-Needs improvement; 2-Satisfactory; 3-Good; 4-Excellent
UNIT 5
86
Read the text about the Taj Mahal and fill in the blanks.
 Group work. Make a poster about a world-famous landmark. 
Write the information about it in the blanks. 
Making a poster about a world-famous 
landmark
Wrapping Up the Topic
UNIT
5
Activity  1
Activity  3
Activity  2
Put a picture here.
Facts about ___________
•  ____________________________
•  ____________________________
•  ____________________________
•  ____________________________
•  ____________________________
Facts about the Taj Mahal
•  a(n) ________________________
•  built it to ___________________
    __________________________ 
•  cost ________________________
•  took ___________ workers _____
    ________ years to build
•  used ______________________
•  receives ____________________
    every year
The Taj Mahal is one of the most famous 
sites in India. Emperor Shah Jahan built it 
to remember his wife, Empress Mumtaz 
Mahal. It cost the emperor millions of 
dollars. Over 20,000 workers spent more 
than 20 years building it and used many 
kinds of expensive stones from different 
parts of the world. Tens of thousands of 
visitors from all 
over the world 
visit there every 
year.
Project
Report your group work to your class and share your story about 
a world-famous landmark.
UNIT 5
87
       Pair work. Listen to the text and fill in the blanks, and then 
talk about the differences between Chinese tea and British tea.
Look at the pictures and complete the text with the help of the first 
letters, and then match the underlined words or phrases with the pictures.
British tea culture began 
around ________.
People mostly plant tea 
_______________________.
There aren’t many
 _____________________.
People drink tea at _____ 
________ of the day.
People drink tea with 
snacks ______________.
People have many _____
of tea to choose from.
Most people prefer to 
drink tea with some  
_____________________.
The Ancient City of Pingyao is in Shanxi Province, China. It has a h______ 
of about 2,800 years. Pingyao is f______ for its city structure and traditional 
culture. The ancient walls in the city are popular with the tourists. There is 
a watchtower at every corner of the city walls. People built the walls and 
w______ to keep themselves safe in the city. Pingyao also had the first 
a______ bank in China. It was the business center in the old times. Today, 
people still respect and keep the ancient culture. They c__________ festivals 
with landboat dances and other shows. Thanks to government protection, we 
can now still experience the past life of Pingyao.
Meimei
China
Steve
Britain
Activity  1
Activity  2
A
B
C
D
Chinese tea has a history 
of many ________ years.
Review
UNIT 5
88
Read the text and fill in the blanks with the correct form of the 
given words.
 Read Li Ming’s diary and answer the questions.
1. Where did Li Ming’s family visit? _____________________________________
2. Where is the Yellowstone National Park?  _______________________________
3. How big is the park? _________________________________________________
4. What do you think of Li Ming’s holiday? Why? ___________________________
Activity  3
Activity  4
January 12th                                        Sunday
    
I had a wonderful holiday last week. I traveled to America with 
my family. 
We visited the Yellowstone National Park. It’s America’s first 
national park, and it sits in the south-west part of the country. 
The park is famous for its beautiful views. It covers about 
9,065 square kilometers. There are high mountains, big rivers, 
hot springs, thick forests, flat grassland, and lots of wild 
animals in the park. I like the natural landscape so much. It’s 
also a great place to relax.
I enjoyed this amazing holiday. I hope I will visit some other 
places one day.
During this summer holiday, I traveled to Britain with my mom. I always wanted 
________ (visit) Hadrian’s Wall, and my dad helped us ________ (book) tickets 
online. The wall is famous around the world, much like the Great Wall of China. 
Today we can only see parts of it, but it is still an amazing place.  
The Romans built Hadrian’s Wall ________ (protect) against the enemy in the 
northwest. It is about 117 kilometers long. Around 15,000 Roman soldiers began 
building the wall under the orders of Emperor Hadrian. They used stones and earth 
________ (make) the wall, and it took them 
about six years ________ (finish) the whole 
wall. Now we are back in China, but the 
thought of Hadrian’s Wall makes me ________ 
(want) to visit Britain again. 
UNIT 5
89
Self -assessment
1. How much do you enjoy the topic?
I’m interested in the topic of amazing places.
I know many famous landscapes and landmarks in the world, such 
as __________________________________________________.
2. How well can you use the language and cultural knowledge?
I can use proper stresses and pauses.    
I can use the vocabulary for/of landscapes and landmarks.
I can use the suffix -y and infinitive to do.
I can share my knowledge of world-famous places.
3. How well can you use English to perform the activities? 
I can talk about famous landmarks.
I can understand the texts and recordings in this unit.
I can discuss an unforgettable trip with my partners.
I can write about an amazing place around the world.
4. How well can you use thinking skills and learning strategies?
I can distinguish facts from opinions.
I can make inferences in reading.
I can work with my partner(s) in pair/group work.
5. How are you satisfied with your group project?
I can make a poster about a world-famous landmark.
I can report our project to the class. 
6. How are you going to improve your English learning?
  ____________________________________________________________________ 
  ____________________________________________________________________
UNIT 5
90
Big Question: What can you see in the sky at night?
In this unit, you will learn to:
 talk about the universe.
 develop an interest of exploring the universe.
  use a table to compare and contrast.
 use the reading strategy of summarizing.
 make a fact file about a planet.
UNIT
6
Earth and Beyond
Earth and Beyond
Preparing for the Topic
A. Match the words with the objects (1–8)
      at the top of the next page.
B. Fill in each blank with an object above.
C.        Pair work. Listen and repeat, and then replace the parts in bold
     and practice with your partner.
What do you know about the Sun?
It is the largest and brightest 
object in the solar system, and 
it gives us light and warmth.
rocket
stars
universe
the Sun
Earth
planets
Moon
satellites
_______ On clear nights, you can see them shining in the sky.
_______ It is much smaller than Earth and goes around Earth once about every 27 days. 
_______ It is the largest and brightest object in the solar system, and it gives us light  
               and warmth.
_______ It sends satellites and people into space, and it is one of the most important
               tools for exploring the solar system.
_______ There are eight of them in the solar system, and they all go around the Sun.
_______ They move around another body in space and can be natural or man-made.
_______ It is the third closest planet to the Sun and our only home in space at present.
_______ It is the whole body of things, and no one knows how wide it is.
Activity  1
UNIT
6
Listening & Speaking
The solar system
We use “the Sun” to mean the 
only star in the solar system, 
and write Earth, Mars, Mercury, etc. for 
the names of the planets in space.
TIPS
UNIT 6
92
1
2
3
4
7
8
6
5
Group work. Collect information about the sun and make a 
report about it.
1. It’s about (150,000,000/15,000,000) kilometers away from the earth to the sun.
2. The temperature at the sun’s surface is about (5,625.85/5,526.85) degrees Celsius.
3. The sun provides energy, light and (electricity/heat) for the earth.
4. In about 3.5 billion years, the sun will be 40% (brighter/heavier) than it is today. 
      Listen to the text and circle the correct words.
 ______________________
 ______________________
 ______________________
 ______________________
 ______________________
 ______________________
Activity  2
Activity  3
We use “the sun” and “the earth” 
when we’re talking about them as 
common things like the sea and the sky.
TIPS
UNIT 6
93
Pair work. Talk about the picture and answer the questions.
        Listen to the conversation and answer the question.
        Listen again and complete the summary.
Pair work. Share your stargazing experiences and make up a 
new conversation with your partner.
Kangkang: Guys, come and watch the stars! They look so clear.                  
Meimei:      Wow, there are so many stars! And some of them shine brighter
                    than others.
Xiao Ya:     Look at the brightest ones. Are they the Big Dipper and the North Star?
Kangkang: Yes, they are. The Big Dipper looks like a spoon. Follow the two 
	
        stars on the right, and you can find the North Star.
Lingling:    Many stars are far, far away. Let me see more through the telescope.
Meimei:      What can you see, Lingling?
Lingling:    Some stars are white, some are blue and some are yellow ...
Xiao Ya:      Let me have a look ... I see red stars. How amazing!
Meimei:      One star never appears at night. Do you know what it is?
Kangkang: Ha! I know. It’s the sun. It’s our daytime star.
Kangkang and his friends ___________ the stars. They can see many stars 
and learn a lot about them. The Big Dipper and the North Star are _______ 
than other stars. Stars can have many different colors, such as _______, blue, 
yellow and _______. The sun doesn’t _______ at night. 
Activity  1
Activity  2
Activity  3
Activity  4
What do you know about the Big Dipper and the North Star?
1. Where are Kangkang and his friends?
2. What are they doing?
A stargazing experience
Function
UNIT 6
94
Look at the pictures and read the words. Pay attention to the 
stresses. 
        Listen and read the sentences. Pay attention to the pauses 
in the sentences. 
        Read the short text aloud. Pay attention to the stresses, 
pauses and rhythms.
1. Most parts of the earth look blue / because of the oceans. 
2. “It is a little bigger / than the earth,” / they guessed.
3. Mercury is the nearest planet / to the Sun / and Neptune is the farthest. 
4. We can watch TV / and make phone calls / with the help / of the satellites. 
5. Earth is closer / to the Sun / than Mars, / but farther from the Sun / than Venus.
'Sun
'planet
'Earth
'satellite
'stars
'Neptune
'Mars
'Mercury
Do you know / 'anything / about 'space? / We 'all 'live on a 'planet, / 
and the planet is 'Earth. / When you 'look up at the 'sky /at 'night, / you 
can 'see / many 'other planets and stars. / The 'Sun is a 'star, / too. / 
There are 'eight planets / 'going around it. / Do you know 'them?
Pronunciation
Activity  1
Activity  2
Activity  3
Stress, Pause & Rhythm
UNIT 6
95
Group
Planets
Size
Elements
the inner planets
Mercury, _______, Earth 
and Mars
smaller
rocks and _________
the outer planets
Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus 
and Neptune
________
gas with ________ inside
Object
Type
Diameter (kilometers)
Color
With life
Sun
star
1,391,400
white
No
Earth
planet
13,000
blue and green
Yes
Read the text and learn how to compare and contrast similar things.
Pair work. Discuss the differences between the inner and outer 
planets based on Activity 2.
Read the text and complete the table.
The Sun is a star. It has a diameter 
of about 1,391,400 kilometers. It 
may look yellow, orange, or even 
red, but its real color is white. There 
are no living things on the Sun.
Earth is one of the eight planets of the 
solar system. The diameter of Earth is 
around 13,000 kilometers. It looks blue 
and green, and it is the only planet with 
life in the solar system.
In the solar system, the Sun is in the center, and 
eight planets go around it. Asteroid Belt separates 
the planets into two groups—the inner planets and 
the outer planets. The inner planets are Mercury, 
Venus, Earth and Mars. They are closer to the Sun.
The outer planets include Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus and Neptune. They are farther away. 
The inner planets are smaller and made of rocks and soil, while the outer planets are 
larger and made of gas with rocks inside. 
Exploring the Topic
UNIT
6
Comparing and contrasting
Activity  1
Activity  2
Activity  3
Tables are useful tools to make comparisons. For example, we can compare different 
traits of many things by using one table.
Thinking Skills
UNIT 6
96
Read the text. Underline the topic sentence for the main idea 
and the key sentences for each supporting detail.
Read the text  and underline the important information, and 
then complete the summary.
Read the text above again and complete the summary.
To write a good summary, you need to identify all the important information and then 
write in your own words.
Why is the sun so important? There are at least two reasons:
• It keeps the planets in the solar system. The sun is the biggest object in the 
  system. It has the power to keep all the planets moving around it.
• It gives heat and light to the earth. The heat gives the just right temperature
  to the living things on the earth. The light is important for people and animals
  to get energy, and plants need the light to grow.
Summarizing
Activity  1
Activity  2
Activity  3
The earth is our only home planet. It is neither too close nor too far from 
the sun. This helps the earth get enough light and heat from the sun. The 
earth is large, and it can hold the right type of air around it. Besides, 
there is plenty of water as well as some dry land on the surface of the 
earth. With water and land, people can live and grow food on the earth.
Reading Strategies
Summary: 
Summary: 
The text mainly talks about the importance of ______________. 
In the text, we can find __________________________________  
______________ in the solar system, and ___________________.
This text is mainly about why the ______________________. 
The main reasons are enough ____________ and ____________, 
the right type of ____________, plenty of ____________ and 
some ____________ on the earth’s surface.
UNIT 6
97
UNIT 6
97
Pair work. Look at the picture and discuss the questions.
Read the text and summarize the main idea. 
When you look up at the sky at night, you can see many stars. But do you 
know the Sun is a star too? Yes, it is the only one in the solar system. As a 
star, the Sun has eight planets around it, and Earth is one of them. 
Among the eight planets, Earth is a middle-sized one, with a diameter of 
around 13,000 kilometers. Three of the planets are smaller than Earth. 
They are Mercury, Venus and Mars. The other four planets are larger. They 
are Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus and Neptune. In the solar system, Jupiter is the 
largest planet, with a diameter of  about 140,000 kilometers. 
Mercury is the closest planet to the Sun, at a distance of about 58 million 
kilometers, while Neptune is the farthest, at a distance of about 4.5 billion 
kilometers. As for Earth, it is the third closest, closer than Mars but farther 
Summary: The text mainly talks about __________ in the solar system. In 
the text, we can find most of the planets are very __________ Earth, while 
Mars may be similar to Earth in ___________.   
Activity  1
Activity  2
1. Which planet do we live on? 
2. Which planet is the largest? 
3. Which planet do you think might have life? 
4. Which planet is the closest to the Sun?
Theme Reading
The amazing solar system
UNIT 6
98
away than Venus and Mercury. Mercury and Venus are much hotter than 
Earth, while Jupiter, Uranus and Neptune are much colder. For example, the 
temperature on Neptune is around minus 200℃. No living things can survive 
on these planets. As our home, Earth is alive with life because it is neither too 
hot nor too cold. Mars is more similar to Earth in size and temperature. And 
there’s also ice there! So scientists are looking for life on Mars.
Besides the eight planets, there are many other smaller ones. Together, they 
make up the amazing solar system.
Read the text again and complete the chart with the main idea 
of each paragraph.
Activity  3
Body
Para. 2: The ____________ of the eight planets.
Para. 3: Distances from the Sun and __________ of the eight 
planets; there is life on Earth and scientists are looking for 
__________ on Mars.
Para. 1: The solar system: the Sun and its _________________ .
Para. 4: The Sun and all the _________________ make up the 
amazing solar system.
Conclusion
Introduction
Planet
Size
Distance from 
the Sun
Temperature
Earth
diameter of ______ 
kilometers
the third closest
neither too hot nor too cold
Mercury
_________ than 
Earth
_______ kilometers
_______ than Earth
Neptune
_________ than 
Earth
_______ kilometers
around minus _______
Jupiter
diameter of _______
kilometers
/
_______ than Earth
Complete the table according to the text. 
Group work. Find out other planets in the solar system on the 
internet, and then share the information in your class.
Activity  4
Activity  5
UNIT 6
99
Look at the pictures and read the sentences. Pay attention to 
the words in bold.
Fill in the blanks with the words in the box.
Complete the text with the words in the box.
Venus and Mercury are two of the closest planets to the Sun.
Because of its _____________ to the Sun and its _____________ in size, 
Mercury is difficult for us to see on Earth. Venus, on the other hand, is 
known for its _____________ and it’s beautiful. People can see it at night 
on Earth.Venus is the hottest planet while the surface temperature on 
Mercury can drop down to -173 ℃ at night. Its _____________ is due to its 
thin air. 
1. The high cost is a big ________ in space exploration. 
2. The development of the space industry will bring more 
________ and create more jobs in different areas.
3. So many stars shine in the ________. What a beautiful night! 
4. Nature can fill our lives with real joy, peace and ________.
business  
weakness
happiness 
darkness
Activity  1
Activity  2
Activity  3
Carefulness and 
responsibility play 
an important role in 
scientific exploration.
Fitness of the body 
and mind is of key 
importance for scientists 
to live and work in space. 
The brightness of a 
star is related to its 
size. The larger, the 
brighter.
coldness                 closeness                 brightness                 smallness
Grammar in Use
The suffix -ness 
UNIT 6
100 UNIT 6
100
Comparative and Superlative Adjectives
add -er/-est
bright -- __________________
add -r/-st
large -- ____________________
change -y into -i, add -er/-est
dry -- _____________________   
double the last consonant and add -er/-est
hot -- _____________________
add more/the most
wonderful -- ________________
irregular form
far -- ______________________ 
Comparative and superlative adjectives
Complete the table and learn how to use comparative and 
superlative adjectives.
Read the text and fill in the blanks with the correct form of the 
given words.
Pair work. Read the conversation. Pay attention to the words 
in bold. 
The Death Valley is known as the _______ (hot) 
place on the earth and the _______ (dry) place 
in North America. In 1913, the _______ (high) 
air temperature of 134°F (56.7℃) reached a 
record here. In summer, the average rainfall in 
the Death Valley is _______ (little) than 5cm. 
But winter and spring are _______ (wet) and the 
weather is more comfortable. Higher places are _______ (cool) than the lower 
areas in the valley.
Activity  1
Activity  2
Activity  3
Yes, so it’s also much 
hotter than Earth.
Mercury is smaller than 
Earth and it is closer to 
the Sun than Earth.  
Yes, I know that! It is the 
closest planet to the Sun.
What are the differences 
between Mercury and 
Earth?
UNIT 6 101
A.        Listen to the letter from Mars and complete the sentences.
Group work. Choose one planet your 
group wants to visit and list the reasons why you 
want to visit it, and then report to the class. 
The information in the box may help you.
B.        Listen again and put the sentences in order.
1. There is no _______ on Mars, so we have to produce some.
2. Mars is _______ than Earth.
3. The Sun rises from the _______.
4. At night, I can see _______ small moons in the sky.
5. Everyone has a _______ spacecraft to go ground on Mars.
____ I was designing a new spacecraft last night.
____ There are 25 hours a day on Mars.
____ I arrived on Mars with my parents last week.
____ Yesterday, I went to the National Park in Olympus Mons with my classmates.
____ I’m looking forward to knowing about Jupiter.
Developing the Topic
UNIT
6
Activity  1
Activity  2
Mercury
• the smallest planet
   in the solar system
• the closest planet
  to the Sun
Venus
• the second brightest
   planet in the solar
   system
• the hottest planet
You may begin like this: Our group wants to visit … one day. It’s …
Oral Communication
Talking about future lives on 
other planets
You can use 
expressions like 
“Really?” “How interesting!” 
“Wow!”, etc. to show your 
attitude in conversations.
TIPS
1
UNIT 6
102
Pair work. Color the Sun, Earth and Mars. Talk about Earth’s 
other neighbors you know.
Earth and its neighbors
Activity  1
Read the text about Earth and Mars and complete the table.
Activity  2
Earth and Its Neighbor—Mars 
Is there any life in outer space? We may think of the same planet—Mars.
Mars is smaller than Earth. It has a diameter of around 6,800 kilometers 
and Earth’s diameter is around 13,000 kilometers. Mars looks red 
because of its red soil, while most parts of Earth look blue because of its 
oceans. As a neighbor planet, Mars is farther from the Sun than Earth. 
Mars is about 228 million kilometers away from the Sun, while Earth 
is about 150 million kilometers away. That is why Mars is colder than 
Earth. The temperature on Mars is about minus 63℃; here on Earth, the 
temperature is about 14℃ on average. Although the two planets have 
many differences, they have something in common—water. On Mars, 
there’s a lot of ice under the ground; On Earth, we have water both on 
and under the ground.
Mars is waiting for us to explore, and so is the universe.
Reading for Writing
UNIT 6 103
Draw a table to compare two planets, and then draft your essay. 
The phrases and sentence patterns may help you.
Rate your draft, and then complete your essay. 
Useful phrases
Useful sentence patterns
because of ...  
away from ... 
on average
in common
It has a diameter of around ...
That is why ...
There is a lot of ...
... is waiting for us to explore, and so is ...
Activity  3
Activity  4
Planet
Diameter
Distance from the Sun
Average 
temperature
Water
How well can you ____________________ ?
Self-
rating
Partner’s 
rating
express your view of scientific exploration
use the thinking skill of making comparison and contrast
introduce Earth and one of its neighbors 
organize ideas into a well-balanced structure
use the theme vocabulary of the unit
use comparative and superlative adjectives
use punctuation
spell the words
Please ask your partner to review your draft for errors and offer suggestions for improvement.
1-Needs improvement; 2-Satisfactory; 3-Good; 4-Excellent
UNIT 6
104
Pair work. Read the fact file of Mercury and introduce it to your 
partner.
Fact File of Mercury
Fact File of ______________
Distance from the Sun: 
_____________________
 Size: 
_____________________
Distance from the Sun: 
about 58 million kilometers away 
from the Sun
Size: 
a diameter of around 4,880 kilometers
— only a little larger than the Moon 
Temperature: ________________________________
Draw a picture here.
Draw a picture here.
Temperature: 
very hot in the daytime and very cold at night
Wrapping Up the Topic
UNIT
6
Making a fact f ile about a planet
Project
Activity  1
Share your fact file in class. Put your fact files together to make a 
class fact file about the universe.
Activity  3
Group work. Design a fact file for another planet in the solar 
system. 
Activity  2
4,880 km
3,476 km
Moon
Mercury
UNIT 6 105
Read the text and fill in the blanks with the correct form of the 
words in the box. 
       Pair work. Listen to the text and fill in the blanks, then retell 
the life of Copernicus.
Nicolaus Copernicus:
• He was born in Poland on _________ 19th, 1473.
• He studied in Poland and later in _________. 
• Copernicus liked to watch the _________. 
His ideas:
• The earth and other planets _________ around the sun.
• The earth is not the center of the universe.
• In _________, Copernicus published a book. About sixty
   years later, scientists proved his ideas _________.
A black hole is at the center of the Milky Way. 
It is one of the strangest and _____________
things in the universe. Nothing around a black 
hole can run away, not even ___________.
Comets are ___________ of the solar system.
They look like snowballs traveling around the 
sun. When comets are getting ___________ to 
the sun, they will become much ___________ 
and leave pieces of ice and rocks behind them. 
It is called a comet’s tail.
Review
Activity  1
Activity  2
hot               close               amazing               member               light
UNIT 6
106
Read the text and answer the questions. 
Group work. Discuss the information and make sentences. 
Pluto is a special planet. It travels 
around the Sun. It takes Pluto 
about 248 Earth years to go 
around the Sun. Clyde Tombaugh 
discovered Pluto in 1930. Pluto 
is about 40 times farther from the 
Sun than Earth. It has five small 
satellites (moons). To have a 
better look at the planet and its 
satellites, scientists sent a spaceship to fly close to it. The spaceship took many 
pictures. Scientists put the pictures together and learned more about Pluto. 
There is no air on the planet. It is so cold on the planet that air would freeze 
into something like snow. Without air, human beings can’t live on the planet.
1. How long does it take Pluto to go around the Sun?
2. Who discovered Pluto?
3. How many satellites (moons) move around Pluto?
4. Why did scientists send a spaceship to fly close to Pluto?
5. Can people live on Pluto? Why or why not?
Planet
Average 
temperature
Size
Distance from 
the Sun
Mercury
higher
large
far
Venus
the highest
larger
farther
Earth
high
the largest
the farthest
Activity  3
Activity  4
The average temperature on Earth is high.
The average temperature on Mercury is higher than that on Earth.
The average temperature on Venus is the highest of the three planets.
Example:
UNIT 6 107
Self -assessment
1. How much do you enjoy the topic?
I’m interested in the topic of the universe.
I know a lot about the universe, such as ____________________
____________________________________________________.
2. How well can you use the language and cultural knowledge?
I can use proper pauses, stresses and rhythms.    
I can use the vocabulary for/of the universe, stars and planets.
I can use the suffix -ness, comparative and superlative adjectives.
I can develop an interest of exploring the universe.
3. How well can you use English to perform the activities? 
I can talk about the solar system.
I can understand the texts and recordings in this unit.
I can discuss future lives on other planets with my partners.
I can write about Earth and its neighbors.
4. How well can you use thinking skills and learning strategies?
I can make comparison and contrast.
I can use summarizing strategy in reading.
I can work with my partner(s) in pair/group work.
5. How are you satisfied with your group project?
I can make a fact file about a planet with my partners.
I can report our project to the class. 
6. How are you going to improve your English learning?
  ____________________________________________________________________ 
  ____________________________________________________________________
UNIT 6
108
Notes to the Text 109
Appendices
附录
Notes to the Text
课文注释
Unit 1　My Dream Job
1. Hi, Lingling. How are you doing today? 嗨，玲玲。你今天过得怎么样？
和“How are you?”一样，“How are you doing?”也是熟人之间见面打招呼的常用问
候语，都可译为“你好吗？”，但后者表达的意思更为丰富。“How are you?”侧重于问对
方的身体状况，而“How are you doing?”则是问对方“近况如何、是否顺利”等。常用
“Fine.”“Very well.”“Not bad.”等来回答。类似的问候语还有“How’s it going?”“How’s your 
day going?”“How’s everything with you?”等。例如：
—Hi, Xiaoming. How are you doing these days? 嗨，小明。你最近好吗？
—Pretty good. Thank you. 非常好。谢谢。
2. It got sick yesterday. 昨天它生病了。
get sick 意为“生病”，sick 意为“生病的”。表示生病还可用be ill。例如：
Kangkang got sick last Monday, so he didn’t go to school. (Kangkang was ill last Monday, so he 
didn’t go to school.) 上个星期一康康生病了，所以他没去上学。
ill 和 sick 都可表示“生病的”，二者的区别在于ill 通常只用作表语，而sick 可以用作表语
和定语。例如：
Lingling was ill yesterday. 昨天玲玲生病了。
He is looking after his sick daughter. 他正在照顾他生病的女儿。
3. But thanks to the vets, it’s doing better now. 但是多亏了兽医，它现在好多了。
1）thanks to 意为“由于；多亏；幸亏”，后接名词或代词。例如：
Thanks to our teachers, we all passed the exam. 多亏了我们的老师，我们都通过了考试。
2）do better 意为“健康状况有所好转，正在恢复中”，此处do 表示正在存在的状态，
句子中使用well 的比较级better 说明相对于生病时的状态有明显改善。例如：
My brother couldn’t swim last month, but he’s doing better after practice. 我哥哥上个月还不
会游泳，但练习后好多了。
Notes to the Text
110
4. A house was on fire and a child was on the sofa in the bedroom. 一间房子着火了，有个小孩
还在卧室的沙发上。
on fire 意为“着火；燃烧”，强调状态。catch fire 意为“着火”，强调动作。例如：
The building was still on fire three hours later. 大楼3 个小时后还在燃烧。
The factory caught fire yesterday. Luckily, no one was hurt. 昨天这家工厂着火了。幸运的是，
没人受伤。
5. We put on the fireman uniforms, rushed to the house, saved the child and put out the fire. 我
们穿上消防服，冲进房子里，救出了这个孩子，扑灭了火。
put out 意为“扑灭；熄灭”。例如：
People called the firefighters to put out the fire in the city center. 人们叫来了消防员来
扑灭市中心的大火。
Did you put out the candle in your study? 你熄灭书房的蜡烛了吗？
6. He is interested in mountains, rivers and forests on Earth, as well as stars in space. 他对地球
上的山川、树林以及太空中的星星都感兴趣。
be interested in (doing) sth. 意为“对（做）某事感兴趣”。例如：
I am interested in playing basketball. 我对打篮球感兴趣。
He is interested in history. 他对历史感兴趣。
7. He is very curious about the secrets of nature. 他对大自然的奥秘感到非常好奇。
be curious about 意为“对……感到好奇”。例如：
It is good to be curious about the world around you. 你对周围的世界感到好奇，这是件好事。
They are curious about the school life in China and other countries. 他们对中国和其他国家的
学校生活感到好奇。
8. Soon after, I found a new job at a bookstore. 不久以后，我在书店找到了一份新工作。
soon after 意为“稍后，不久以后”。例如：
Soon after, he sent me a book about Chinese culture. 不久以后，他给我寄了一本关于中国文
化的书。
9. With shelves of books all around me, I really enjoyed my work. 周围都是摆满了书籍的书架，
我真的很喜欢我的工作。
with shelves of books all around me 是with 的复合结构，在句子中作状语，表示伴随。
with 的复合结构：with + 宾语+ 宾语补足语。其中宾语通常是名词或代词，宾语补足语
通常是doing、to do、done、介词短语、形容词或副词。该结构常作伴随、方式、原因、条件
等状语。例如：
I like to sleep with the windows open. 我喜欢开着窗户睡觉。
Notes to the Text 111
With a lot of work to do, he can’t go out. 他有很多工作要做，不能外出。
He walked in the classroom with a book in his hand. 他走进教室，手里拿着一本书。
Unit 2　The World of Art
1. What a pity! 真遗憾! /真可惜!
当我们对某事感到遗憾或可惜时，常用此句来表达。也可以在该句的后面加上具体感到
遗憾的事情或原因。例如：
What a pity that you couldn’t come here yesterday! 昨天你不能来，真遗憾！
What a pity that she didn’t tell me earlier. 真遗憾，她没有早点告诉我。
类似的表达还有：“It’s a pity that …”。例如：
It’s a pity that you can’t stay longer. 你不能再多待些时间，真是遗憾。
2. The violin and erhu belong to the string instruments and the drum belongs to the beat 
instruments. 小提琴和二胡属于弦乐器，鼓属于打击乐器。
belong to 意为“属于；是（某族类或纲目）的一部分”，to 为介词。常见搭配为belong to 
sb./sth.，意为“归某人所有/ 属于”。例如：
This book belongs to my brother. 这本书是我哥哥的。
Lions belong to the cat family. 狮子属于猫科。
3. It can help us speak our minds and allow us to communicate heart to heart. 它（音乐）可以
帮助我们说出心里话，并且让我们心灵相通。
allow sb. to do sth. 意为“允许某人做某事”。例如：
His parents won’t allow him to stay out late. 他的父母不会允许他在外待到很晚。
4. When Mei was young, he had great difficulty in remembering the lines of Beijing opera. 梅
（兰芳）年轻的时候很难记住京剧的台词。
have (great) difficulty/problems/trouble in doing sth. 意为“做某事有（很大）困难”，介词 
in 可以省略。例如：
When I have difficulty (in) learning English, I will ask my teacher for help. 当我学习英语有困
难时，我就会向我的老师求助。
5. There is a great bridge over the river. 河上有一座大桥。
over 用作介词，意为“在……上面；穿越；悬在……上面”。例如：
There is a lamp hanging over the table. 有一盏灯吊在桌子上方。
They held a large umbrella over her. 他们给她撑起一把大伞。
6. Each color stands for a different type of character. 每种颜色代表一种不同的角色。
stand for ... 意为“代表/ 象征……”。例如：
Notes to the Text
112
—What does EU stand for? EU 代表什么？
—It stands for the European Union. 它代表欧盟。
7. Each plays its part in its own way. 每种角色都以自己的方式扮演。
play a/one’s part 意为“扮演角色；发挥作用”。play a part (in sth.) 意为“参与某事”。例如：
The world is a stage, and every person plays his or her part on it. 世界是个大舞台，每个
人都扮演着自己的角色。
Everyone should play a part in protecting the environment. 每个角色都有其独特的表演方式。
Unit 3　Sound Body, Sound Mind
1. What’s wrong with you? 你怎么了？
“What’s wrong (with sb.)?”常用来询问疾病、意外伤害等，相当于“What’s the matter (with 
sb.)?”。在询问对方健康状况时，二者可以互换。
用来询问疾病、不适或突发情况时，还可以用“What’s the trouble (with ...)?”“What 
happened (to ...)?”“Is there anything wrong (with ...)?”等。例如：
You don’t look well. What’s the trouble? 你看起来气色不好，怎么了？
2. I just took my temperature. I have a fever. 我量了一下体温，我发烧了。
1）take one’s temperature 意为“量体温”。例如：
I had a cold. My mom took my temperature. 我感冒了。我妈妈给我量了体温。
2）have a(n) + 疾病的名称，表示“患……病”。例如：
have a cough/cold 咳嗽/ 感冒
have a headache/stomachache/toothache/backache 头痛/胃痛/牙痛/背痛
注意：“have the flu”表示“得了流感”。
3. I’m sorry to hear that. 听到这个消息我很难过。
本句是用来表示同情或遗憾的常见用法。当听到别人说到不好的情况时，可以用此句表
示安慰。有时也可以用“What a pity/shame!”等。例如：
—My uncle is in hospital, and I will visit him. 我叔叔生病住院了，我要去看望他。
—Oh, I’m sorry to hear that./What a pity/shame! 听到这个消息我很难过。/真遗憾！
4. You need to take a rest and take some pills. 你需要休息并服些药。
take pills 意为“服药”。在英语中，常用动词eat、 have 和 take 来表示 “吃”。eat 指“吃东
西；吃饭”，它可以和have 互换使用；have 既有“吃”也有“喝”的意思；take 通常表示“服
（药）”。例如：
—What do you usually have for breakfast? 你早饭通常吃什么？ 
Notes to the Text 113
—I usually have a sandwich and a glass of milk. 我通常吃一个三明治，喝一杯牛奶。
It’s bad for you to take too much medicine. 服太多药对你身体不好。
5. When doing sports, they both need to take care of their safety. 在做运动时，她们都需要注意
自己的安全。
when doing sports 的完整表达是when they are doing sports。省略的是主语和be 动词。例如：
We should not talk when eating. 吃东西的时候，我们不要讲话。（when 后面省略了we are）
6. For one thing, it can help build a strong body. 首先（一方面），它有助于强身健体。
for one thing 意为“首先；一方面”，常和 for another (thing) 搭配使用，构成 for one thing …; 
for another (thing) …（首先……；其次……/一方面……；另一方面……）结构。例如：
Let him design for us. For one thing, he is good at drawing; for another, he is interested in 
designing. 让他来帮我们设计吧。一方面，他善于绘画；另一方面，他对设计很感兴趣。
7. In my opinion, staying positive has amazing benefits. 在我看来，保持积极的态度有令人
惊奇的好处。
in one’s opinion 意为“在某人看来”，表示个人观点或看法。例如：
In his opinion, it is a big question. 在他看来，这是一个大问题。
8. Hi, Meimei. I am glad to come across your post. 嗨，梅梅。我很高兴能看到你的帖子。
come across 意为“偶然发现；偶然遇到”。例如：
I came across Li Xiang on the street yesterday. 我昨天在街上偶然碰到了李想。
9. Finally, if we do have bad feelings, we can write them down. 最后，如果我们确实心情不佳，
我们可以把这些坏心情写下来。
1）if 意为“如果”，在这里引导条件状语从句。例如：
If you see him, give him this note. 你如果见到他，就把这个便条给他。
2）句中do 用于加强语气。例如：
He does look tired. 他的确显得很疲倦。
10. Talking to ourselves is a useful way to get through difficult moments. 跟我们自己交谈是一
种度过艰难时光的有效方法。
本句的主语是动名词短语talking to ourselves，谓语动词用第三人称单数形式。例如：
Learning English all by yourself is not easy. 完全靠你自己学英语并不容易。
Unit 4　Changing and Growing
1. ―Why do you look upset? 你为什么看起来很沮丧？ 
　―I’m feeling nervous about tomorrow’s speech. 我对明天的演讲感到紧张。
Notes to the Text
114
look、feel 都可用作系动词，后接形容词作表语，分别意为“看起来……”“感觉到……；
摸起来……”。例如：
You look great! 你看起来很不错呀！
I don’t feel well today. 我今天感觉不太舒服。
具有同样用法的词还有：sound“听起来”、taste“尝起来”、smell“闻起来”等。例如：
The food smells good and tastes nice. 这食物闻起来很香，尝起来味道也很好。
2. I failed the English exam. 我英语考试不及格。
fail 在本句中意为“不及格”，还可以表示“失败；未能做到”。fail to do sth. 意为“未
做成某事”。例如：
He failed his driving test. 他驾驶执照考试不及格。
His mistake made the school team fail in the game. 他的失误使校队在比赛中失败了。
She failed to get into the art college. 她未能进入艺术学院。
3. Now, Li Hong has many friends at school and gets along well with us. 现在，李红在学校有了
很多朋友，并且与我们相处融洽。
get along well with sb. 意为“与某人关系良好、和睦相处”。 例如：
They get along well with each other. 他们相处得很好。
4. Last October, I signed up for a music club. 去年10 月，我报名参加了一个音乐俱乐部。
sign up 意为“报名参加……”，后面一般接for sth.。例如：
What language class did you sign up for? 你报了什么语言课程？
5. During my 8th grade, I went through many changes. As I was growing taller, I was gaining 
weight quickly. 八年级时，我经历了许多变化。我的个子迅速长高，体重也增加得很快。
gain weight 在这里指“体重增加”。例如：
Some people gain weight after they stop smoking. 有些人戒烟后确实增加体重了。
weight 意为“重量，分量”，常见的搭配有：put on weight 意为“增重；体重增长”，lose 
weight 意为“减肥；体重减轻”。
Unit 5　Amazing Places
1. It’s going to begin in 20 minutes. 还有20 分钟就要开始了。
 
“in + 一段时间”表示“在一段时间之后”，常和一般将来时态连用。例如：
I’ll be off work in 20 minutes. 我20 分钟后下班。
如果表示“在某个时刻后”，则用“after + 时间点”。例如：
He will come back after 10:30 p.m. 他晚上十点半（10 点30 分）以后会回来。
2. It’s said that there are about 9,000 rooms. 据说那里大约有9000 个房间。
Notes to the Text 115
“It’s said that …” 意为“据说……”。例如：
It is said that Shennong was the first to discover tea as a drink. 据说神农是第一个发现茶可以
作为饮品的人。
It is said that she lived to over 100. 据说她活了100 多岁。
3. Baiyang Lake is also rich in culture. 白洋淀文化底蕴深厚。
be rich in ... 意为“富含……；含有丰富的……”。例如：
Oranges are rich in vitamin C. 橘子含有丰富的维生素C。
He is poor in money, but rich in knowledge. 他贫于金钱，但富于学问。
背景知识
Baiyang Lake：白洋淀，又名西淀，古称掘鲤淀。白洋淀是国家5A 级景区，在河北省保
定市雄安新区安新县境内，古有“北地西湖”之称，今有“华北明珠”之誉，诗赞“北国江南”，
歌咏“鱼米之乡”。白洋淀水域辽阔，烟波浩渺，风景绝美，气候宜人。 
4. As a Chinese saying goes, “ Heaven above, Suzhou and Hangzhou below ”. 中国有句谚语：上
有天堂，下有苏杭。
as a Chinese saying goes … 意为 “中国有句谚语……”。as a saying goes … 常用来引出
谚语、格言等，意为“俗话说……；正如谚语所说……”。例如：
As a Chinese saying goes, “Seeing is believing.” 中国有句老话：眼见为实。
As an old Chinese saying goes, “A journey of a thousand miles begins with a single step”. 中国
有句老话：千里之行，始于足下。
5. Feel free to leave us any message below! 请随时在下方给我们留言！
feel free to do sth. 意为“随时做某事”。例如：
Feel free to ask questions if you don’t understand. 你要是不懂，可以随便提问。
Please feel free to call me for any question. 如果有任何问题，请随时给我打电话。
背景知识
The Honghe Hani Rice Terraces：红河哈尼梯田位于中国云南省红河哈尼族彝族自治州元
阳县，据记载已有1300 多年的历史。红河哈尼梯田是以哈尼族为主的各族人民利用当地“一
山分四季，十里不同天”的地理气候条件创造的农耕文明奇观，是我国第一个以民族名称命
名、以农耕文明为主题的活态世界遗产。红河哈尼梯田的中心区是元阳梯田。其所有的梯田
都修筑在山坡上，梯田坡度在15 度至75 度之间。以一座山坡而论，梯田可达3000 多级。
6. It is not only a place of interest but also a symbol of the nation. 它不只是一个名胜古迹，也
是中国的一个象征。
not only … but (also) … 是一个连词词组，意为“不仅是……而是/也是……”，连接两个
成分，表示递进，在语意上强调的是 but 后面的内容。例如：
Notes to the Text
116
It is not only a job but (also) a way of life. 这不仅仅是一份工作，也是一种生活方式。
It is famous not only in China but also in the whole world. 它不仅闻名中国，而且闻名
世界。
Unit 6　Earth and Beyond
背景知识
太阳系的八大行星按照离太阳的距离，从近到远依次为水星、金星、地球、火星、木星、
土星、天王星、海王星。行星的定义：一是必须围绕恒星运转的天体；二是质量足够大，能
依靠自身引力使天体呈球形；三是这个轨道附近没有其他物体。与之前提到的九大行星概念
不同，由于质量和轨道等方面的原因，在2006 年8 月24 日于布拉格举行的第二十六届国际
天文学联会上通过的第五号决议中，冥王星被划为矮行星，不再归为行星之列。至此，太阳
系中被认为只有八大行星。
1. On clear nights, you can see them shining in the sky. 在晴朗的夜晚，你能看到它们在天空中
闪闪发光。
see sb./sth. doing sth. 意为“看到某人或某物正在做某事”；see sb./sth. do sth. 意为“看到
某人或某物做某事（的全过程）”。例如：
The boy saw the old man walking on the street. 这个男孩看到一位老人正在街道上散步。
I saw you put a key into your pocket. 我看到你把钥匙放进口袋里了。
2. The Big Dipper looks like a spoon. 北斗七星看起来像一把勺子。
look like 意为“与……外表相似；看来好像；仿佛”，相当于be like。此处like 为介词，
意为“相似；类似”。例如：
Lily looks like her father. 莉莉长得像她爸爸。
3. Asteroid Belt separates the planets into two groups—the inner planets and the outer planets. 小
行星带将太阳系的行星分为两组——内行星和外行星。
separate ... into ... 意为“分成；分为”。separate … from … 意为“把……和……分开；
与……分离”。例如：
She separated the cake into six equal pieces. 她把蛋糕分成六等份。
You need to separate the white clothes from other colored ones before washing. 在洗衣服前你
需要把白色衣服和其他颜色的衣服分开。
4. It is neither too close nor too far from the sun. 它（地球）离太阳既不太近也不太远。
neither … nor … 意为 “既不……也不……”可连接两个并列成分。例如：
This bag is neither big nor small. 这个包不大也不小。
与neither … nor … 容易混淆的短语是either … or …，其意为 “不是……就是……；要
Notes to the Text 117
么……要么……”。 例如：
She’s either Russian or Polish. 她不是俄罗斯人就是波兰人。
当neither … nor … 和either … or … 连接两个主语时主谓搭配需遵循“就近原则”，即谓
语动词的单复数形式由离谓语动词最近的主语的单复数来决定。例如：
Either you or I am going to do the job. 这项工作要么你来做，要么我来做。
Neither the books nor the coat is Mr. Zhang’s. 这些书和这件外套都不是张先生的。
5. Mercury is the closest planet to the Sun, … while Neptune is the farthest, … 水星是离太阳最
近的行星，……而海王星则是离太阳最远的行星，……
while 在这里意为“而，然而”，表示对比，有轻微的转折之意。例如：
Zhao Jie is very good at sports, while his brother is not. 赵杰很擅长运动，而他的哥哥则
不然。
6. Although the two planets have many differences, they have something in common—water. 尽
管这两个行星很不相同，但它们也有相似之处——水。
although 意为“虽然；尽管； 即使；然而”，同义词是though。均可以引导让步状语从句，
但不可以和but 连用。例如：
Although the Sun was shining, it wasn’t very hot. 尽管太阳高照，但天气并不很热。
I felt he was wrong, although I didn’t say so at the time. 我觉得他错了，尽管我当时没说出来。
Grammar
118
Grammar
语法
Ⅰ. 一般将来时（The Simple Future Tense）
一般将来时表示将来某个时间要发生的动作或存在的状态，也表示将来经常或反复发生
的动作，常与表示将来的时间状语连用，如tomorrow、soon、later、next week/month/year、in 
a few days/months/years 等。
1. 由“助动词will/shall + 动词原形”构成。
表示未来的事实或对将来的预测。在口语中，will 在代词后常缩写为’ll, will not 常缩写为
won’t。在疑问句中，主语为第一人称（I/we）时，常用助动词shall。
人　称
肯 定 式
否 定 式
疑 问 式
第一人称
I/We will go.
I/We will not go.
Shall I/we go?
第二人称
You will go.
You will not go.
Will you go?
第三人称
He/She/It will go.
They will go.
He/She/It will not go.
They will not go.
Will he/she/it go?
Will they go?
2. 由“be going to + 动词原形”构成。
表示打算、计划、意愿要做的事情或有迹象表明即将发生的事，也用来表示自然现象。例如：
—What are you going to do this Sunday? 这个星期日你打算干什么？
—I’m going to play basketball with my classmates. 我打算和我的同学们去打篮球。
Look at those clouds! It’s going to rain. 瞧那些乌云！快要下雨了。
3. 现在进行时表示将来。
表示位置移动的动词 go、come、leave、fly、start、meet、move 等，可以用现在进行时
表示将要发生的事。例如：
—When are you starting out? 你什么时候出发？
—I’m leaving tomorrow. 我明天离开。
4. 一般现在时表示将来。
1）表示按计划要发生的事。例如：
The train leaves/arrives at 10:45. 火车10 点45 分开/到。
2）在时间状语从句或条件状语从句中用一般现在时表示将来。例如：
Grammar 119
When she comes, I’ll tell her about it. 她来时我将把这件事告诉她。
If it doesn’t rain tomorrow, I’ll go to the zoo. 如果明天不下雨，我将去动物园。
注意：There be 句型用在一般将来时中，其结构为：There will be .../There is/are going to 
be ...。例如：
There will be a meeting in this hall this afternoon. 这个厅今天下午有个会。
There is going to be an art festival next weekend. 下周末将有一个艺术节。
Ⅱ. 感叹句（The exclamatory sentence）
主要用来表示说话人说话时的惊异、气愤、赞赏、哀叹、遗憾等情绪。它通常由how 和
what 来引导，并将how 或what 放在句首，主语和谓语用正常词序位于其后，句末一般用感
叹号。
1. 由how 引导的感叹句。
在这种感叹句中，其结构一般为“How + 形容词/ 副词 + 主语 + 谓语！”。how 修饰形
容词、副词或动词。例如：
How lovely the girl is! 这个女孩真可爱啊！
How hard they study! 他们学习真努力啊！
How time flies! 时间过得真快呀！
2. 由what 引导的感叹句。
在这种句型中，其结构一般为“What + a/an + 形容词 + 名词 + 主语 + 谓语！”。what 修饰
名词。例如：
What a big fish it is! 多么大的一条鱼啊！
3. 在感叹句中经常用省略形式，即将句中的主语和谓语动词省略。例如：
What a pity! 真遗憾！
How beautiful! 真漂亮！
4. 在可数名词的复数形式和不可数名词前不可以用“how + 形容词”构成感叹句，应该
用“what + 形容词 + 可数名词的复数形式/ 不可数名词”。例如：
What strange ideas you have! 你的想法好奇怪啊！
What wonderful weather it is! 多好的天气啊！
Ⅲ. 情态动词（Modal Verb）
情态动词有其自身词汇意义, 表示或暗示某种情绪或说话者对某一动作或状态的态度，
如可能、意愿、愿望、建议、必要、允许等。但它们不能单独作谓语，必须和具有实际意义的
动词一起构成谓语。情态动词通常没有人称和数的变化，其后要跟动词原形。
Grammar
120
英语中的情态动词主要有can、could、may、might、shall、should、will、would、must、need 等。
情态动词
否定式及否定式简略形式
can
can not = can’t
could
could not = couldn’t
may
may not = mayn’t
might
might not = mightn’t
shall
shall not = shan’t
should
should not = shouldn’t
will
will not = won’t
would
would not = wouldn’t
must
must not = mustn’t
need
need not = needn’t
注意：美式英语中常用must not 而不用mustn’t。mayn’t、mightn’t 和shan’t 也很少用。
1. can（could）的基本用法。
1）表示能力，意为“能；会”。can 表示现在的能力，could 表示过去的能力。例如：
Can you play the piano? 你会弹钢琴吗？
She couldn’t come yesterday because she was ill. 她昨天不能来是因为她病了。
2）表示请求、允许，意为“可以”。例如：
Could you show me the way? 你可以告诉我怎么走吗？
You can borrow my dictionary. 你可以借我的词典。
注意：表示请求、允许时，could 比can 语气更委婉。
3）表示可能。例如：
The moon can’t always be full. 月有阴晴圆缺。
Could it be Li Hong? 可能是李红吗？
注意：表示可能性时，could 比can 表示的可能性小。
2. may (might) 的基本用法。
1）表示可能，通常用于肯定句。例如：
He might get there in time. 他可能会及时赶到那里。
注意：might 比 may 的可能性小，更具有不确定性。
2）表示允许或征求同意，多用于肯定句和疑问句中。例如：
You may use my pen. 你可以用我的笔。
Grammar 121
May I park here? 我可以在这儿停车吗？
Might I use your phone? 我可以用你的电话吗？
注意：在提出请求时，might 比 may 语气更委婉，更有礼貌。
句型“Can/May/Could/Might I ...?”表示请求对方许可。其中can 语气最不正式；could 语气
比较客气、委婉；may/might 用于正式场合，语气恭敬；might 比may 更为客气。例如：
Can I sit beside you? 我可以坐在你旁边吗？
May I use your pen? 我可以借用一下你的笔吗？
Could you give me a hand? 你能帮我一个忙吗？
Might I have your email address? 我可以要你的电子邮箱地址吗？
回答时可以说：
肯定：Of course./Yes, you can/may.
否定：No, you can’t/may not.
3. must 的基本用法。
1）表示必要、命令、义务，意为“必须；一定要”，可用于肯定句和疑问句中。例如：
You must take care of your parents. 你必须照顾你的父母。
2）must 表示推测，意为“一定；准是”，常用于肯定句。例如：
The letter must be from her pen pal. 这封信一定是她笔友寄来的。
3）表示劝告或建议，意为“应当”，表明事情的必要性与重要性。例如：
You must do more exercise. 你应该多锻炼。
注意：must 的否定式， must not/mustn’t 表示不许、禁止，意为“不能；一定不要”。例如：
You must not play on the road. 不许在路上玩耍。
回答用must 提问的疑问句时，要用don’t have to 或needn’t 作否定回答，不能用mustn’t。
例如：
—Must we keep the windows open all the time? 我们得一直让窗户开着吗？
—No, you don’t have to./No, you needn’t. 不，没有必要。
must 和have to 都有“必须”的含义，但各自的侧重点不同。must 强调说话者的主观看法，
而have to 强调客观的需要。例如：
I must leave now. 我现在得走了。（我想走）
She missed the bus and had to walk home. 她没赶上公共汽车，只好步行回家。（错过公共
汽车的客观原因导致她不得不步行回家。）
must 没有人称、数和时态的变化，have to 则有。例如：
I had to borrow some money at that time. 那时我只好借些钱。
4. shall 和should 的基本用法。
1）shall 的用法。
Grammar
122
表示征询意见，主要用于第一人称的疑问句中。例如：
Shall I take you to the hospital? 要不要我带你去医院？
2）should 的用法。
①表示义务、责任，意为“应该；应当”。例如：
We should save water. 我们应该节约水。
We should protect the environment. 我们应当保护环境。
②表示提出或征询建议。例如：
You should go to see a doctor. 你应当去看医生。
You shouldn’t always stay at home and play computer games. 你不应该总是待在家里玩电脑
游戏。
5. need 的基本用法。
表示“必须；需要”，多用于疑问句和否定句中。其否定式needn’t 意为“不必”。例如：
—Need I take off my shoes? 我需要脱鞋吗？
—No, you needn’t. 不，不必了。
You needn’t hurry. 你不必着急。
注意：need 也可用作实义动词。例如：
You need to show your school card.  你需要出示校园卡。
My jacket needs washing. 我的夹克该洗了。
Ⅳ. 过去进行时（The Past Continuous Tense）
过去进行时表示过去某个时刻或某段时间正在进行的动作。
1. 过去进行时的构成
过去进行时由“was/were + 现在分词(v.-ing)”构成。以动词read 为例，将过去进行时的
肯定式、否定式、疑问式以及简略答语列表如下：
肯定式
否定式
疑问式
简略答语
I was reading.
I was not reading.
*Was I reading?
*Yes, I was. / 
No, I wasn’t.
You were reading.
You were not reading.
Were you reading?
Yes, I was. / 
No, I wasn’t.
He/She/It was reading.
He/She/It was not 
reading.
Was he/she/it 
reading?
Yes, he/she/it was. / 
No, he/she/it wasn’t.
Grammar 123
肯定式
否定式
疑问式
简略答语
We were reading.
We were not reading.
*Were we reading?
*Yes, we were. / 
No, we weren’t.
You were reading.
You were not reading.
Were you reading?
Yes, we were. / 
No, we weren’t.
They were reading.
They were not reading.
Were they reading?
Yes, they were. / 
No, they weren’t.
注:* 代表自问自答。
2. 过去进行时的基本用法
1）过去进行时表示过去某个时刻正在进行的动作，时间状语往往是表示过去的某一时间
点。例如：
What were you doing at 8:30 this morning? 今天早上八点半你在干什么?
When I called him, he was having dinner. 当我给他打电话的时候，他正在吃晚饭。
2）过去进行时还表示过去某段时间内持续进行的动作。如：
—What were you doing from seven to nine yesterday? 昨天七点到九点你在干什么？
—I was reading the whole morning yesterday. 昨天整个上午我都在看书。
3）一般过去时和过去进行时的比较
一般过去时表示在过去某个时间发生的动作或存在的状态，而过去进行时则表示在过去
某个时刻或某段时间正在进行的动作。例如：
He wrote a letter yesterday evening. 他昨晚写了一封信。（信写完了）
He was writing a letter yesterday evening. 他昨晚一直在写一封信。（信不一定写完）
Ⅴ. 动词不定式（Infinitive）
1. 动词不定式的基本形式是“to + 动词原形”，有时可以不带to。动词不定式在句中不能
单独作谓语，不随主语的人称和数的变化而变化。 
2. 动词不定式具有名词、形容词和副词的特征，可以在句中作主语、表语、宾语、宾语
补足语、定语和状语。
功　能
例　句
作主语
To see is to believe.
It’s impolite to eat noisily in Cuba.
（续表）
Grammar
124
功　能
例　句
作表语
I think the first step is to make a good plan.
Your group’s task is to finish the survey by Friday.
作宾语
I want to make a room reservation.
We decide to take the train.
作宾语
补足语
Miss Wang asked Kangkang to book the tickets.
The teacher tells the children not to eat unhealthy food.
作定语
The best way to travel is by train.
He was the last one to leave school yesterday.
作状语
They organized a show to raise money.
Let’s work in groups to carry out the project.
注意：1）不定式作主语时，谓语动词用第三人称单数；常用it 作形式主语，把真正的不
定式主语放在后面。例如：
It’s polite to hold the door for people after you. 为后面的人把着门是一种礼貌。
2）动词begin、decide、forget、hope、learn、like、need、plan、try、want 等后面常接不
定式作宾语。例如：
Xiao Lin likes to ride a bicycle to the park with Kangkang. 肖林喜欢和康康一起骑自行车去公园。
help 后接不定式作宾语可带to, 也可不带to。例如：
They helped (to) raise money for a school in Nigeria. 他们帮助尼日利亚的一所学校筹钱。
3）动词ask、tell、want、invite、wish、allow、teach 等后面常接不定式作宾语补足语。例如：
They invited me to go to Beijing with them. 他们邀请我和他们一同去北京。
You can ask them to get ready before hand. 你可以让他们提前做好准备。
have、let、make 等使役动词及feel、hear、notice、see、watch 等感官动词后面常接不带
to 的不定式作宾语补足语。例如：
She always tells me jokes and makes me laugh. 她总是给我讲笑话，使我开怀大笑。
I saw the boy come across the street. 我看见那个男孩穿过了街道。
3. 动词不定式的否定形式由“not + 动词不定式”构成。例如：
The police officer told the boys not to play in the street. 警察告诉那些男孩不要在街上玩耍。
The teacher asks us not to be late for school. 老师要求我们上学不要迟到。
4. 动词不定式可以和疑问词what、which、how、where、when 等连用，相当于名词。例如：
I don’t know what to do. 我不知道要做什么。
（续表）
Grammar 125
Could you tell me where to buy a scarf ? 你能告诉我去哪儿买围巾吗？
I don’t know how to remove these bad feelings. 我不知道如何消除这些坏情绪。
Ⅵ. 形容词的比较等级（Comparative and Superlative Adjective）
1. 比较等级的含义
大部分形容词有三个级：（1）原级（positive degree）, 即原形；（2）比较级（comparative 
degree），表示“较……”或“更……一些”；（3）最高级（superlative degree），表示“最……”。
表示两者的比较时用比较级。例如：
This room is bigger than that one. 这个房间比那个大。
表示三者或三者以上中“最……”时，用最高级。例如：
The rabbit is the smallest of them. 兔子是它们中最小的。
2. 形容词的比较等级
形容词比较等级的规则变化
构成方法
原级
比较级
最高级
单音节
词和少
数双音
节词
一般在词尾加-er 或-est
great
strong
greater
stronger
greatest
strongest
以字母e 结尾的词加-r 或-st
brave
fine
braver
finer
bravest
finest
以重读闭音节结尾且末尾只有
一个辅音字母，先双写这个辅
音字母，再加-er 或-est
big
fat
bigger
fatter
biggest
fattest
以“辅音字母+y”结尾的词，
先变-y 为-i，再加-er 或-est
happy
lucky
happier
luckier
happiest
luckiest
多音节
词和部
分双音
节词
在词前加more 或most
serious
interesting
more serious
more interesting
most serious
most interesting
注：1）形容词比较等级所加的-er 和-est，自成一个音节，分别读作/9/ 和/Ist/。例如：
quick 
 
 
quicker  
 
quickest
happy 
 
 
happier  
 
happiest
如果形容词原级的词尾为字母r, 在加-er 和-est 时，r 要发/r/ 音。例如：
near 
 
 
nearer  
 
nearest
clever 
 
 
cleverer  
 
cleverest
Grammar
126
如果形容词原级词尾的发音为/M/, 在加-er 和-est 时，/M/ 音后须加一个/G/ 音。例如：
long 
 
 
longer  
 
longest
strong 
 
 
stronger  
 
strongest
2）有些形容词的比较等级用-er 和-est 或more 和the most 皆可，如clever、lovely 等。
3）表示“较不……”和“最不……”时，可用less 与the least。例如：
difficult 
 
 
less difficult 
 
the least difficult
有些形容词的比较等级变化是不规则的。常见的有：
原级
比较级
最高级
good/well
better
best
bad/ill
worse
worst
many/much
more
most
little
less
least
far
farther/further
farthest/furthest
3. 形容词比较等级的基本用法
1）比较级：常用于“比较级+ than”结构。例如：
Cats are more lovely than other animals. 猫比其他动物更可爱。
This article is less difficult than that one. 这篇文章不如那篇文章难。
2）最高级：常用“the + 最高级+ 比较范围”结构，比较范围常用of、in、among 引导
的短语表达。例如：
The Great Wall of China is one of the greatest wonders in the world. 中国长城是世界上最伟大
的奇观之一。
I think roses are the most beautiful of all the flowers. 我认为玫瑰花在所有的花中是最漂亮的。
She was the eldest among them. 她是她们当中年纪最大的。
注：在一定的上下文中，形容词最高级后的名词（所谓的中心词）可省去。例如：
He is the youngest in the class. 他是班上年龄最小的（学生）。
4. 比较结构中还须注意以下问题：
1）比较级与最高级的结构可以转换，意思不变。例如：
The Changjiang River is longer than the other rivers in China. 在中国，长江比其他河流都长。
The Changjiang River is the longest river in China. 长江是中国最长的河流。
2）当某一事物与其他事物作比较时，被比较事物中不能包括本身。例如：
He is taller than any other student in his class. 他比班上其他学生都高。
Shanghai is larger than any city in Hubei. 上海比湖北任何一个城市都大。
Grammar 127
3）如果比较对象相同，可用that/those 代替第二个比较对象。例如：
The weather in Shanghai is better than that in Wuhan. 上海的天气比武汉的要好。
The texts in Book Ⅲ are much easier than those in Book Ⅳ. 第三册的课文要比第四册的容易
得多。
4）两个比较级用and 连在一起可表达全面增加或减少，意为“越来越……”。例如：
The weather is getting warmer and warmer. 天气变得越来越暖和。
She is becoming more and more beautiful. 她变得越来越漂亮。
5）“the + 比较级，the + 比较级”表示“越……，越……”。例如：
The more, the better. 越多越好。
The more you practice, the easier it becomes. 你练得越多，做起来就越容易。
6）表示两者中“较……”时，用“the + 形容词比较级+ of 短语”来表达。例如：
He is the taller of the two. 他是两人中较高者。
7）形容词的比较级可用much、a little、a lot、even 等修饰，使原来的比较级在语意上更
加明确。例如：
Chickens are much smaller than cows. 鸡要比奶牛小得多。
This movie is a little more interesting than that one. 这部电影比那部更有趣一些。
This will make our job even more difficult. 这会使我们的工作变得更困难。
Tapescripts 
128
Tapescripts
听力文本
Unit 1　My Dream Job
Listening & Speaking Activity 2
1. Xiao Ya:	
Pencils, brushes, paper and erasers are my tools. I draw or paint in the park, by the 
river or at other places. What do I do?
　Kangkang:	Let me see. Oh, you are an artist.
2. Kangkang:	I work with actors, actresses and other artists. I give directions to them. Together with 
them, I produce films. What do I do?
　Xiao Ya:	
Interesting! I believe you are a director.
Oral Communication Activity 1
I’m Li Xiang. My dream job is to be a pilot. I can go to so many places, maybe anywhere in the 
world. But, I know, it is not easy. I’m going to study hard and exercise every day. I won’t give up!
I’m Li Hong. I want to be a zookeeper because I love animals. I’ll learn to take care of them and try 
to be their best friend.
I’m Kangkang. I wanted to be a taikonaut a few years ago because I dreamed of traveling in space 
one day. But now I want to be a doctor. Doctors can help sick people. I will go to a medical school 
and try to achieve my dream.
Review Activity 1
Kangkang:	Hello, Xiaolu. Welcome to My Job talk show.
Xiaolu:	
Thank you for inviting me.
Kangkang:	Xiaolu, what’s your job?
Xiaolu:	
I’m a dentist.
Kangkang:	Sounds interesting. Why do you want to be a dentist?
Xiaolu:	
Well, I want to help people with their teeth. And it pays well.
Kangkang:	Then, how did you get your job?
Xiaolu:	
I went to a medical school. I worked very hard and did well in all my exams.
Tapescripts 129
Kangkang:	That’s great. Do you have any plans for your job?
Xiaolu:	
Well, I need to get more experience, so I will practice more. Also, I want to study more.
Kangkang:	Hope you do well in your job and help more people. Thank you for being here today.
Xiaolu:	
My pleasure!
Unit 2　The World of Art
Listening & Speaking Activity 2
Welcome to Beijing Art Museum! Do you like Chinese buildings? Look at this museum. It is an 
ancient Chinese building. This building itself is a great artwork. Now, let’s get in. We can see 
calligraphy works, photography works, paintings and many others here. There is also a show on 
ancient money today. Follow me, please. I will show you around.
Oral Communication Activity 1
Lingling:	 Hey, Kangkang. Do you know anything about Chinese paper-cut?
Kangkang:	Yes, it’s a very popular Chinese folk art. It has a history of over 1500 years.
Lingling:	 Wow! Do you know how to make a paper-cut?
Kangkang:	Yes, we fold a piece of paper and then use a pair of scissors to cut out different shapes.
Lingling:	 That sounds interesting! What kind of paper-cuts do you like to make?
Kangkang:	I like to make animals. But my grandma likes cutting flowers.
Lingling:	 Why do you make paper-cuts?
Kangkang:	Well, paper-cuts express our wishes and hopes. We also make the Chinese character “Fu” 
and put it upside down on the door. It is a symbol of good luck. 
Lingling:	 How wonderful! Can you teach me how to do paper-cuts?
Kangkang:	No problem.
Review Activity 1
Lingling:	Hi, Li Xiang. What do you think of art?
Li Xiang:	I think art is a very important part of our life.
Lingling:	I think so, too. Art isn’t different from any other things in our daily life. Everyone is an 
artist. 
Li Xiang:	Yes, we can draw pictures, take photos, and make videos like an artist.
Lingling:	You’re right. Also, art is a kind of language of the heart. Sometimes, art can speak better 
than words.
Tapescripts 
130
Li Xiang:	That’s correct. Art can tell a story, record human history, and pass on cultures.
Lingling:	Yes. Art is a creative activity. It can keep our minds active.
Li Xiang:	Sure. 
Unit 3　Sound Body, Sound Mind
Listening & Speaking Activity 2
Wang Junfeng:	I’m Wang Junfeng. I play phone games too much. I always feel tired. But I can’t 
stop myself. What should I do?
Lingling:	
You need to stay away from phone games. Also you need to go to bed early and do 
more sports. 
Xiao Ya:	
I’m Xiao Ya. I want to be slim, so I only eat vegetables. Now I always feel hungry. 
And I often have a headache. What should I do?
Lingling:	
You need a healthy diet, and you should do some exercise. You don’t need to be slim 
to look pretty.
Oral Communication Activity 1
Teacher Li:	Good morning, class. Let’s welcome Dr. Li. Today he’s going to tell us something about 
healthy food.
Dr. Li:	
I’m very happy to be with you. Please feel free to ask me about food and healthy diet.
Student A:	 Dr. Li, what food is healthy?
Dr. Li:	
Fruit and vegetables are healthy. We need to eat them every day. 
Student B:	 How about potatoes?
Dr. Li:	
Potatoes are good vegetables, but potato chips are junk food.
Student C:	 I like eating chocolate and candies. Are they unhealthy food?
Dr. Li:	
Yes. They are bad for your teeth. You should eat less of them.
Student D:	 I usually have a glass of milk, some eggs and bread for breakfast. Is that okay?
Dr. Li:	
That’s great. We need to eat more of these foods. 
Teacher:	
Thank you so much, Dr. Li. 
Review Activity 1
(Shanshan and Jeff are talking about the cooking of their countries.)
Hey there! I’m Shanshan from China. Chinese cooking is an art. Different food needs different cooking 
methods and tools. Most Chinese foods are healthy. At the same time, Chinese cooking focuses on 
Tapescripts 131
color, smell, and taste. In the north, noodles are popular while rice is the main food in the south.
Hi everyone! Jeff here from the UK. British cooking is mostly simple and easy. We love easy meals 
like sandwiches, fruit, and drinks. We also enjoy dishes with plenty of meat and vegetables. We use 
sauces to make foods taste better, and potatoes are often served as the main food.
Unit 4　Changing and Growing
Listening & Speaking Activity 2
1. Kangkang:	I have the flu. I can’t go out. I can’t visit my grandparents and I can’t see my friends. I 
feel tired. What should I do?
　Ding ...
　Li Xiang:	 Me, too. I do some reading and drawing to help me feel better. You can have a try!
2. Kangkang:	I feel so happy! It’s the Spring Festival in Chinatown today. I enjoyed the fireworks 
and I got a red packet from a shop keeper. Lucky!
　Ding ...
　Li Xiang:	 How much lucky money did you get?
　Ding ...
　Kangkang:	50 yuan.
Oral Communication Activity 1
(In the garden, Mr. Jason was watering the flowers.)
Mike:	 Dad, my favorite rock band will hold a concert in our town next weekend. How exciting!
Jason:	They’re quite popular. Did you get the ticket?
Mike:	 No, but my friend Jameson can help me to get one.
Jason:	Jameson?
Mike:	 Yes, Jameson sells hot dogs at the stadium. I’m happy to have him as a friend. La la la …
(Two days later in the bedroom)
Jason:	What were you doing this afternoon?
Mike:	 I was just sitting here, Dad. Jameson didn’t get the tickets.
Jason:	Oh …  Are you feeling upset?
Mike:	 …  A little. 
Jason:	I know your feeling. In fact, I saw the band’s show ten years ago. I was almost crazy about it.
Mike:	 Really?
Tapescripts 
132
Jason:	Yes. I asked my friends to help me buy two tickets. Jameson and you can go to the concert.
Mike:	 Wow! You’re the best, Dad! But … I want to go with you.
Jason:	Me?
Mike:	 Yes, most parents of my friends don’t even know this band. I really want to have this special 
experience with you. 
Jason:	I’m so glad to hear that.
Review Activity 1
Xiao Ya:	Mom, do I look fat in my new dress? I’m going to wear it to Xiaoxiao’s birthday party. 
Mom:	
No. You look great!
Xiao Ya:	Really? My friend Li Hong has such beautiful long legs.
Mom:	
Beauty isn’t about legs or faces. It’s about confidence. Everyone is special! Be yourself and 
everyone will think you are beautiful. 
Xiao Ya:	But I don’t think I am …
Mom:	
Look, you’re good at math and you are a good runner. You are beautiful in your own way. 
Xiao Ya:	I get it, mom. I will wear this dress at Xiaoxiao’s birthday party.
Mom:	
Good for you. 
Unit 5　Amazing Places
Listening & Speaking Activity 2
It’s 5 o’clock in the morning now. We are walking on Tian’anmen Square. It’s so large. It’s 880 
meters long from the north to the south and 500 meters wide from the east to the west. It’s cold and 
dark out here, yet it’s quite crowded already. We are getting excited. The flag raising ceremony is 
going to begin in 20 minutes. We can’t wait to see the national flag going up. 
Oral Communication Activity 1
Interviewer:	Kangkang, you visited many places these years. What’s your favorite?
Kangkang:	 That should be Lake Hillier.
Interviewer:	Where is it?
Kangkang:	 It’s a small lake in the west of Australia, next to the Indian Ocean. It’s famous for its 
color.
Interviewer:	What color is it?
Kangkang:	 It’s pink. I was surprised to see a pink lake next to the blue ocean from the plane.
Tapescripts 133
Interviewer:	That’s wonderful! What’s your favorite place in China?
Kangkang:	 Yangshuo! It’s in the north-east of Guangxi. The special geography makes it beautiful.
Interviewer:	What do you mean?
Kangkang:	 We took boat trips along Lijiang River. We saw many hills in shapes of animals on both 
sides of the river.
Interviewer:	Oh, that’s really a lot of fun. 
Kangkang:	 Yes, and the food there is very delicious.
Interviewer: I want to visit there already.
Review Activity 1
Hello, everyone! I’m Meimei. I’m from China. Let me tell you something about our tea culture. 
China is one of the first countries in the world to plant tea, and Chinese tea has a history of many 
thousand years. People mostly plant tea in the south. And we can drink tea at any time of the day and 
we have many choices to choose from.
Hi! I’m Steve. I’m from Britain. Let me tell you about tea in my country. The tea culture began 
around 1660 in the UK. Black tea is our favorite. We don’t have many tea gardens. We have to 
buy tea from other countries. We drink tea with some snacks in the afternoon. It’s very important 
in our daily life. Most people prefer to drink tea with some milk.
Unit 6　Earth and Beyond
Listening & Speaking Activity 2
The sun is at the center of the solar system. It is about 4.5 billion years old and 150 million kilometers 
away from the earth. The temperature at the sun’s surface is about 5526.85 ℃. The sun provides 
energy, light and heat for the earth. According to scientists, in about 3.5 billion years from now, the 
sun will be 40% brighter than it is today, and it will get bigger and bigger. In about 4.5 billion years, 
the sun will turn into a huge red ball and then die by breaking into small pieces.
Oral Communication Activity 1
Dear Xiaozhe,
　　How are you doing on Jupiter? I arrived on Mars with my parents last week. There is no air here, 
so we have to produce some by ourselves. Mars is colder than Earth and the Sun rises from the east. 
There is a wonderful view of two small moons in the sky at night. There are 25 hours a day on Mars. 
Tapescripts 
134
Yesterday, I went to the National Park in Olympus Mons with my classmates. It’s one of the largest 
mountains in the solar system. Everyone has a small spacecraft to get around on Mars. Last night, I 
was designing my own spacecraft. I hope I can explore the whole universe one day.
　　Tell me something interesting about your experiences on Jupiter. I’m looking forward to hearing 
from you soon.
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　Best,
Kangkang　　
Review Activity 1
Nicolaus Copernicus was born in Poland, on February 19th, 1473. Copernicus studied in Poland and 
later in Italy. He studied some subjects and then became an officer in a Roman church.
In his spare time, Copernicus liked to watch the sky. He put forward many ideas about the solar 
system. For example, the earth and other planets travel around the sun. And the earth is not the 
center of the universe. At that time, people didn’t believe him. They thought Copernicus was crazy. 
Copernicus published his ideas in a book in 1543, but his book didn’t change people’s view about the 
universe.  However, until about sixty years later, scientists proved his ideas right.
Words in Each Unit 135
ＷｏｒｄｓｉｎＥａｃｈＵｎｉｔ
注：星号词为小学阶段已学过的二级词，黑体词为《英语课程标准（２０２２
年版）》要求初中阶段应学习和掌握的基本词，白体词为课文中只要求理解的拓
展词。
Ｕｎｉｔ１
ＰｒｅｐａｒｉｎｇｆｏｒｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
ｄｉｒｅｃｔｏｒ／ｄəˈｒｅｋｔə（ｒ）；ｄａＩˈｒｅｋｔə（ｒ）／
ｎ．导演
（２）
ｐｏｓｔｍａｎ／ˈｐəʊｓｔｍəｎ／（ｐｌ．ｐｏｓｔｍｅｎ
／ˈｐəʊｓｔｍəｎ／）ｎ．邮递员，邮差
（２）
ｂｕｉｌｄｅｒ／ˈｂＩｌｄə（ｒ）／ｎ．建筑工人
（２）
ａｒｔｉｓｔ／ˈ􀱷􀱷ːｔＩｓｔ／；／ˈ􀱷􀱷ːｒｔＩｓｔ／ｎ．艺术家；
（尤指）画家
（２）
ｇｕｉｄｅ／ｇａＩｄ／ｎ．导游；指南　ｖ．指引；指导（２）
ｐｉｌｏｔ／ˈｐａＩｌəｔ／ｎ．飞行员
（２）
ｓｃｉｅｎｔｉｓｔ／ˈｓａＩəｎｔＩｓｔ／ｎ．科学家；科研人员（２）
ｓｅｎｄ／ｓｅｎｄ／ｖ．邮寄；发送；传达；派遣
（２）
∗ｌｅｔｔｅｒ／ˈｌｅｔə（ｒ）／ｎ．信；信件
（２）
ｐａｉｎｔ／ｐｅＩｎｔ／ｖ．用颜料画
（２）
ｅｒａｓｅｒ／ＩˈｒｅＩｚə（ｒ）／；／ＩˈｒｅＩｓəｒ／ｎ．橡皮
（３）
ｔｏｏｌ／ｔｕːｌ／ｎ．工具
（３）
ａｃｔｏｒ／ˈæｋｔə（ｒ）／ｎ．演员
（３）
ａｃｔｒｅｓｓ／ˈæｋｔｒəｓ／ｎ．女演员
（３）
ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ／ｄəˈｒｅｋʃｎ；ｄａＩˈｒｅｋʃｎ／ｎ．指导；方向（３）
ｐｒｏｄｕｃｅ／ｐｒəˈｄｊｕːｓ／；／ｐｒəˈｄｕːｓ／ｖ．制作；拍摄
（３）
ｂｅｌｉｅｖｅ／ｂＩˈｌｉːｖ／ｖ．相信；把（某事）当真
（３）
ｓｉｃｋ／ｓＩｋ／ａｄｊ．生病的
（４）
ｔｈａｎｋｓ／􀱺􀱺æ􀱻􀱻ｋｓ／ｅｘｃｌ．谢谢，多谢　ｎ．感谢；
谢意
（４）
ｖｅｔ／ｖｅｔ／ｎ．兽医
（４）
ｅｘｃｅｌｌｅｎｔ／ˈｅｋｓəｌəｎｔ／ａｄｊ．优秀的；杰出的；
极好的
（４）
ｄａｎｃｅｒ／ˈｄ􀱷􀱷ːｎｓə（ｒ）／；／ˈｄæｎｓəｒ／ｎ．舞蹈演员；
跳舞者
（４）
ｌｉｖｅｌｙ／ˈｌａＩｖｌｉ／ａｄｊ．活跃热情的；精力充沛的
（４）
ｎｅｗｓ／ｎｊｕːｚ／；／ｎｕːｚ／ｎ．新闻；消息
（４）
ｒｅｐｏｒｔｅｒ／ｒＩˈｐɔːｔə（ｒ）／；／ｒＩˈｐɔːｒｔəｒ／ｎ．记者
（４）
ｍａｙｂｅ／ˈｍｅＩｂｉ／ａｄｖ．或许
（４）
ｒｅｐｏｒｔ／ｒＩˈｐɔːｔ／；／ｒＩˈｐɔːｒｔ／ｎ．，ｖ．报道
（４）
ＥｘｐｌｏｒｉｎｇｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
ｂｌｉｎｄ／ｂｌａＩｎｄ／ａｄｊ．瞎的；失明的
（６）
ｐａｔｉｅｎｔ／ˈｐｅＩʃｎｔ／ｎ．病人　ａｄｊ．有耐心的
（６）
Words in Each Unit
136
ｒａｉｌｗａｙ／ˈｒｅＩｌｗｅＩ／ｎ．铁路；铁道
（６）
ｍｏｄｅｒｎ／ˈｍɒｄｎ／；／ˈｍ􀱷􀱷ːｄəｒｎ／ａｄｊ．现代的；
当代的；近代的
（７）
ｆｕｔｕｒｅ／ˈｆｊｕːｔʃə（ｒ）／ｎ．将来；未来
（７）
ａｌａｒｍ／əˈｌ􀱷􀱷ːｍ／；／əˈｌ􀱷􀱷ːｒｍ／ｎ．警报；闹铃
（７）
ｒｅｃｅｉｖｅ／ｒＩˈｓｉːｖ／ｖ．受到，收到
（７）
ｓｏｆａ／ˈｓəʊｆə ／ｎ．沙发
（７）
ｆｉｒｅｍａｎ／ˈｆａＩəｍəｎ／；／ˈｆａＩəｒｍəｎ／（ｐｌ．ｆｉｒｅｍｅｎ
／ˈｆａＩəｍəｎ／；／ˈｆａＩəｒｍəｎ／）ｎ．消防队员（７）
ｕｎｉｆｏｒｍ／ˈｊｕːｎＩｆɔːｍ／；／ˈｊｕːｎＩｆɔːｒｍ／ｎ．制服；
校服
（７）
ｒｕｓｈ／ｒʌʃ ／ｖ．迅速移动
（７）
ｄａｎｇｅｒｏｕｓ／ˈｄｅＩｎｄʒəｒəｓ／ａｄｊ．有危险的
（７）
ｂｒａｖｅ／ｂｒｅＩｖ／ａｄｊ．勇敢的
（７）
ｔｉｎｙ／ˈｔａＩｎｉ／ａｄｊ．极小的；微小的
（８）
ｔａｉｋｏｎａｕｔ／ˈｔａＩｋəｎɔːｔ；ˈｔａＩｋəˌｎɔːｔ／ｎ．（中国的）
航天员
（８）
ｐｉｏｎｅｅｒ／ˌｐａＩəˈｎＩə（ｒ）／；／ˌｐａＩəˈｎＩｒ／ｎ．先锋；
带头人；开发者
（８）
ｊｏｕｒｎｅｙ／ˈｄʒɜːｎｉ／；／ˈｄʒɜːｒｎｉ／ｎ．（尤指长途）
旅行
（８）
ｔｒａｉｎｉｎｇ／ˈｔｒｅＩｎＩ􀱻􀱻／ｎ．训练；培训
（８）
ｗｉｔｈｏｕｔ／ｗＩˈðａʊｔ／ｐｒｅｐ．没有；缺乏
（８）
ｒｅａｄｙ／ˈｒｅｄｉ／ａｄｊ．准备好
（８）
ｎｅａｒｌｙ／ˈｎＩəｌｉ／；／ˈｎＩｒｌｉ／ａｄｖ．差不多；将近（８）
ｃｈａｎｃｅ／ｔʃ􀱷􀱷ːｎｓ／；／ｔʃæｎｓ／ｎ．机会；机遇
（８）
ｓｐａｃｅｓｈｉｐ／ˈｓｐｅＩｓʃＩｐ／ｎ．（航天）飞船
（８）
ｓｕｃｃｅｅｄ／ｓəｋˈｓｉːｄ／ｖ．成功；实现目标
（８）
ａｃｔ／æｋｔ／ｎ．行为；行动；所为ｖ．扮演；行动（９）
ｅｓｐｅｃｉａｌｌｙ／Ｉˈｓｐｅʃəｌｉ／ａｄｖ．尤其；特别
（９）
ｑｕａｌｉｔｙ／ˈｋｗɒｌəｔｉ／；／ˈｋｗ􀱷􀱷ːｌəｔｉ／ｎ．人品；素质；
质量　ａｄｊ．优质的，高质量的
（９）
ａｃｃｏｒｄｉｎｇ（ｔｏ）／əˈｋɔːｄＩ􀱻􀱻ｔｕ／；／əˈｋɔːｒｄＩ􀱻􀱻ｔｕ／
据（……所说）；按（……所报道）
（９）
∗ｇｒａｎｄｐａ／ˈｇｒæｎｐ􀱷􀱷ː／（ｇｒａｎｄｆａｔｈｅｒ
／ˈｇｒæｎｆ􀱷􀱷ːðə（ｒ）／）ｎ．爷爷；姥爷
（１０）
∗ｐｉａｎｏ／ｐｉˈæｎəʊ／ｎ．钢琴
（１０）
ｉｎｔｅｒｅｓｔｅｄ／ˈＩｎｔｒəｓｔＩｄ；ˈＩｎｔｒｅｓｔＩｄ／
ａｄｊ．感兴趣的；关心的
（１０）
ｄｉｒｅｃｔ／ｄəˈｒｅｋｔ；ｄａＩˈｒｅｋｔ／ｖ．导演；指挥
ａｄｊ．直接的
（１０）
ｍｏｖｉｅ／ˈｍｕːｖｉ／ｎ．电影
（１０）
ｉｌｌｎｅｓｓ／ˈＩｌｎəｓ／ｎ．（身体或精神上的）疾病，病
（１０）
ｅｘｐｌｏｒｅｒ／Ｉｋˈｓｐｌɔːｒə（ｒ）／ｎ．探险者
（１０）
ｃｕｒｉｏｕｓ／ˈｋｊʊəｒｉəｓ／；／ˈｋｊʊｒｉəｓ／ａｄｊ．求知欲
强的；好奇的
（１０）
ｓｅｃｒｅｔ／ˈｓｉːｋｒəｔ／ｎ．秘密
（１０）
∗ｔｏｍｏｒｒｏｗ／ｔəˈｍɒｒəʊ／；／ｔəˈｍ􀱷􀱷ːｒəʊ／
ａｄｖ．在明天；在明日　ｎ．明天；明日（１１）
ｏｐｉｎｉｏｎ／əˈｐＩｎｊəｎ／ｎ．意见；想法
（１１）
ｃｏｕｒｓｅ／ｋɔːｓ／；／ｋɔːｒｓ／ｎ．课程；进程
（１１）
ｏｆｆｉｃｅｒ／ˈɒｆＩｓə（ｒ）／；／ˈ􀱷􀱷ːｆＩｓəｒ／ｎ．高级职员，
官员；军官
（１１）
ｖｏｔｅ／ｖəʊｔ／ｖ．投票；选出
（１１）
ｃｈｏｏｓｅ／ｔʃｕːｚ／ｖ．选择；挑选
（１１）
ｌａｗｙｅｒ／ˈｌɔＩə（ｒ）／ｎ．律师
（１１）
ｃｏｍｐｅｔｉｔｉｏｎ／ˌｋɒｍｐəˈｔɪʃｎ／；／ˌｋ􀱷􀱷ːｍｐəˈｔɪʃｎ／
ｎ．比赛；竞赛
（１１）
ｅｎｃｏｕｒａｇｅ／ＩｎˈｋʌｒＩｄʒ ／；／ＩｎˈｋɜːｒＩｄʒ ／ｖ．鼓励；
激励
（１１）
ｐｒｏｕｄ／ｐｒａʊｄ／ａｄｊ．骄傲的；自豪的
（１１）
ｓｕｃｃｅｓｓ／ｓəｋˈｓｅｓ／ｎ．成功；胜利
（１１）
Words in Each Unit 137
ＤｅｖｅｌｏｐｉｎｇｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
ｚｏｏｋｅｅｐｅｒ／ˈｚｕːｋｉːｐə（ｒ）／ｎ．动物园管理员
（１２）
ａｃｈｉｅｖｅ／əˈｔʃｉːｖ／ｖ．（凭长期努力）达到
（某目标、地位、标准）；完成；成功
（１２）
ｄｅｓｉｇｎ／ｄＩˈｚａＩｎ／ｖ．设计；构思；计划
ｎ．设计；构思；设计方案
（１３）
ｍｏｄｅｌ／ˈｍɒｄｌ／；／ˈｍ􀱷􀱷ːｄｌ／ｎ．模型；模特儿（１３）
ｓｃｉｅｎｔｉｆｉｃ／ˌｓａＩəｎˈｔＩｆＩｋ／ａｄｊ．科学（上）的（１３）
ｋｎｏｗｌｅｄｇｅ／ˈｎɒｌＩｄʒ ／；／ˈｎ􀱷􀱷ːｌＩｄʒ ／ｎ．知识；学问
（１３）
ｃｈａｌｌｅｎｇｅ／ˈｔʃæｌＩｎｄʒ ／ｎ．挑战
（１３）
ｈｏｗｅｖｅｒ／ｈａʊˈｅｖə（ｒ）／ａｄｖ．然而
（１３）
ＷｒａｐｐｉｎｇＵｐｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
ｓｈｅｌｆ／ʃｅｌｆ／（ｐｌ．ｓｈｅｌｖｅｓ／ʃｅｌｖｚ／）ｎ．架子，搁板
（１５）
ｒｅａｄｅｒ／ˈｒｉːｄə（ｒ）／ｎ．读者
（１５）
ｒｅｃｏｒｄ／ˈｒｅｋɔːｄ／；／ˈｒｅｋəｒｄ／ｎ．记录；记载
／ｒＩˈｋɔːｄ／；／ｒＩˈｋɔːｒｄ／ｖ．记录；记载
（１５）
ｄｅｎｔｉｓｔ／ˈｄｅｎｔＩｓｔ／ｎ．牙科医生
（１６）
ｒｅａｓｏｎ／ˈｒｉːｚｎ／ｎ．原因；理由
（１６）
ｒｅｓｅａｒｃｈ／ｒＩˈｓɜːｔʃ／；／ｒｉˈｓɜːｒｔʃ／ｎ．研究；调查
（１６）
ｔｏｕｒｉｓｔ／ˈｔʊəｒＩｓｔ／；／ˈｔʊｒＩｓｔ／ｎ．游客
（１６）
ｓｐｅｅｃｈ／ｓｐｉːｔʃ ／ｎ．演说；讲话
（１７）
ｔｅｒｍ／ｔɜːｍ／；／ｔɜːｒｍ／ｎ．学期
（１７）
ｗａｉｔｒｅｓｓ／ˈｗｅＩｔｒəｓ／ｎ．女服务员
（１７）
ｇｒｅｅｔ／ｇｒｉːｔ／ｖ．和（某人）打招呼（或问好）；
欢迎；迎接
（１７）
ｇｕｅｓｔ／ｇｅｓｔ／ｎ．客人；宾客
（１７）
ｓｍｉｌｅ／ｓｍａＩｌ／ｎ．，ｖ．微笑
（１７）
ｌｅａｄ／ｌｉːｄ／ｖ．带路；领路
（１７）
ｂｏｒｉｎｇ／ˈｂɔːｒＩ􀱻􀱻／ａｄｊ．没趣的；令人厌倦
（或厌烦）的
（１７）
ｃｕｓｔｏｍｅｒ／ˈｋʌｓｔəｍə（ｒ）／ｎ．顾客
（１７）
ｃｏｎｖｅｒｓａｔｉｏｎ／ˌｋɒｎｖəˈｓｅＩʃｎ／；／ˌｋ􀱷􀱷ːｎｖəｒˈｓｅＩʃｎ／
ｎ．交谈，谈话
（１７）
ｍａｎａｇｅｒ／ˈｍæｎＩｄʒə（ｒ）／ｎ．经理
（１７）
ｎｏｉｓｙ／ˈｎɔＩｚｉ／ａｄｊ．吵闹的；充满噪声的
（１７）
ｓｉｍｐｌｅ／ˈｓＩｍｐｌ／ａｄｊ．简单的；易做的
（１７）
ｓｕｃｃｅｓｓｆｕｌ／ｓəｋˈｓｅｓｆｌ／ａｄｊ．获得成功的；
有成就的
（１７）
Ｕｎｉｔ２
ＰｒｅｐａｒｉｎｇｆｏｒｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
ｌｉｔｅｒａｔｕｒｅ／ˈｌＩｔｒəｔʃə（ｒ）／ｎ．文学；文学作品
（２０）
ｃａｌｌｉｇｒａｐｈｙ／ｋəˈｌＩｇｒəｆｉ／ｎ．书法；书法艺术（２０）
ｓｗａｎ／ｓｗɒｎ／；／ｓｗ􀱷􀱷ːｎ／ｎ．天鹅
（２０）
ｗｅｓｔ／ｗｅｓｔ／ｎ．西；西方　ａｄｊ．西方的；西部的；
向西的
（２０）
ｔｅａｈｏｕｓｅ／ˈｔｉːｈａʊｓ／ｎ．茶馆
（２０）
ｂａｌｌｅｔ／ˈｂæｌｅＩ／；／ｂæˈｌｅＩ／ｎ．芭蕾舞剧；芭蕾舞
（２０）
ｃｅｎｔｕｒｙ／ˈｓｅｎｔʃəｒｉ／ｎ．百年；世纪
（２０）
ｅｘｐｒｅｓｓ／Ｉｋˈｓｐｒｅｓ／ｖ．表达
（２０）
ｓｐｉｒｉｔ／ˈｓｐＩｒＩｔ／ｎ．精神；情绪
（２０）
Words in Each Unit
138
ｃｌａｓｓｉｃ／ˈｋｌæｓＩｋ／ａｄｊ．最优秀的；有代表性的；
传统的
（２０）
ｎｏｖｅｌ／ˈｎɒｖｌ／；／ˈｎ􀱷􀱷ːｖｌ／ｎ．小说
（２０）
ｏｉｌ／ɔＩｌ／ｎ．（绘画用）油彩；石油；原油
（２０）
ｃａｌｌｉｇｒａｐｈｅｒ／ｋəˈｌＩｇｒəｆə（ｒ）／ｎ．书法家
（２０）
ａｎｃｉｅｎｔ／ˈｅＩｎʃəｎｔ／ａｄｊ．古代的；古老的
（２１）
ｐｈｏｔｏｇｒａｐｈｙ／ｆəˈｔɒｇｒəｆｉ／；／ｆəˈｔ􀱷􀱷ːｇｒəｆｉ／
ｎ．摄影；摄影艺术
（２１）
ｗｏｏｄ／ｗʊｄ／ｎ．木；木头；木柴
（２２）
ｓａｎｄ／ｓæｎｄ／ｎ．沙；沙子
（２２）
ｃｏｒｒｅｃｔ／ｋəˈｒｅｋｔ／ａｄｊ．准确无误的；正确的（２２）
ｗｏｗ／ｗａʊ／ｅｘｃｌ．哇，呀
（２２）
ｐｉｔｙ／ˈｐＩｔｉ／ｎ．遗憾，可惜
（２２）
ＥｘｐｌｏｒｉｎｇｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
ｔｙｐｅ／ˈｔａＩｐ／ｎ．类型，种类；典型；字体
ｖ．打字
（２４）
ｍｕｓｉｃａｌ／ˈｍｊｕːｚＩｋｌ／ａｄｊ．音乐的
（２４）
ｉｎｓｔｒｕｍｅｎｔ／ˈＩｎｓｔｒəｍəｎｔ／ｎ．乐器；仪器；工具
（２４）
ｓｔｒｉｎｇ／ｓｔｒＩ􀱻􀱻／ｎ．弦
（２４）
ｂｅａｔ／ｂｉːｔ／ｎ．一击，击打；节拍　ｖ．击打；打败
（２４）
ｋｅｙｂｏａｒｄ／ˈｋｉːｂɔːｄ／；／ˈｋｉːｂɔːｒｄ／ｎ．琴键；键盘
（２４）
ｖｉｏｌｉｎ／ˌｖａＩəˈｌＩｎ／ｎ．小提琴
（２４）
ｂｅｌｏｎｇ／ｂＩˈｌɒ􀱻􀱻／；／ｂＩˈｌɔː􀱻􀱻／ｖ．应在（某处）；
适应
（２４）
ｄｒｕｍ／ｄｒʌｍ／ｎ．鼓
（２４）
ｔｒｕｍｐｅｔ／ˈｔｒʌｍｐＩｔ／ｎ．小号；喇叭
（２４）
ｌａｎｇｕａｇｅ／ˈｌæ􀱻􀱻ｇｗＩｄʒ ／ｎ．语言
（２４）
ａｌｌｏｗ／əˈｌａʊ／ｖ．允许；使可能
（２４）
ｃｏｍｍｕｎｉｃａｔｅ／ｋəˈｍｊｕːｎＩｋｅＩｔ／ｖ．交流；沟通
（２４）
ｆｅｅｌｉｎｇ／ˈｆｉːｌＩ􀱻􀱻／ｎ．感觉，感触；情感；想法
（２４）
ｒｅｌａｘ／ｒＩˈｌæｋｓ／ｖ．（使）放松；放松精神
（或思想）
（２４）
ａｆｒａｉｄ／əˈｆｒｅＩｄ／ａｄｊ．害怕；担心
（２４）
ｍｅｄｉｕｍ／ˈｍｉːｄｉəｍ／（ｐｌ．ｍｅｄｉａ／ˈｍｉːｄｉə ／）
ｎ．（传播信息等的）媒介，手段，方法
（２４）
∗ｅｙｅ／ａＩ／ｎ．眼睛
（２５）
ｐｉｇｅｏｎ／ˈｐＩｄʒＩｎ／ｎ．鸽子
（２５）
ｏｐｅｒａ／ˈɒｐｒə ／；／ˈ􀱷􀱷ːｐｒə ／ｎ．歌剧
（２５）
ｓｔｒｉｃｔ／ｓｔｒＩｋｔ／ａｄｊ．要求严格的；严厉的；
严谨的
（２５）
ｐｅｒｆｅｃｔ／ˈｐɜːｆＩｋｔ／；／ˈｐɜːｒｆＩｋｔ／ａｄｊ．完美的；
极好的
（２５）
ｐａｉｎｔｅｒ／ˈｐｅＩｎｔə（ｒ）／ｎ．画家；油漆匠
（２５）
ｐｏｐｕｌａｒ／ˈｐɒｐｊəｌə（ｒ）／；／ˈｐ􀱷􀱷ːｐｊəｌəｒ／
ａｄｊ．大众喜爱的；广受欢迎的；
大众（化）的
（２５）
ｓｅｎｔｅｎｃｅ／ˈｓｅｎｔəｎｓ／ｎ．句子；判决，宣判（２５）
ｈｕｇｅ／ｈｊｕːｄʒ ／ａｄｊ．巨大的；极多的
（２６）
ｇａｔｅ／ｇｅＩｔ／ｎ．大门；栅栏门
（２６）
ｔｏｗｅｒ／ˈｔａʊə（ｒ）／ｎ．塔；塔楼
（２６）
ｖａｌｕｅ／ˈｖæｌｊｕː／ｖ．重视；珍视　ｎ．价值
（２６）
ｎｏｒｔｈｅｒｎ／ˈｎɔːðəｎ／；／ˈｎɔːｒðəｒｎ／ａｄｊ．北方的；
北部的
（２６）
ｄｙｎａｓｔｙ／ˈｄＩｎəｓｔｉ／；／ˈｄａＩｎəｓｔｉ／ｎ．王朝；朝代
（２６）
Words in Each Unit 139
ａｍａｚｉｎｇ／əˈｍｅＩｚＩ􀱻􀱻／ａｄｊ．令人大为惊奇的；
（尤指）令人惊喜的
（２６）
ｃｅｎｔｉｍｅｔｒｅ／ˈｓｅｎｔＩｍｉːｔə（ｒ）／（ｃｅｎｔｉｍｅｔｅｒＡｍＥ）
ｎ．厘米
（２６）
ｐｕｌｌ／ｐʊｌ／ｖ．拉；拖；拽
（２６）
ｓｈｏｕｔ／ʃａʊｔ／ｖ．大声说；叫
（２６）
ｒｉｖｅｒｓｉｄｅ／ˈｒＩｖəｓａＩｄ／；／ˈｒＩｖəｒｓａＩｄ／ｎ．河畔；
河岸
（２６）
ｒｉｖｅｒｂａｎｋ／ˈｒＩｖəｂæ􀱻􀱻ｋ／；／ˈｒＩｖəｒｂæ􀱻􀱻ｋ／ｎ．河堤；
河岸
（２６）
ｍａｒｋ／ｍ􀱷􀱷ːｋ／；／ｍ􀱷􀱷ːｒｋ／ｖ．标示；标明方位；
做记号　ｎ．符号；记号
（２６）
ｂｕｓｉｎｅｓｓｍａｎ／ˈｂＩｚｎəｓｍæｎ；ˈｂＩｚｎəｓｍəｎ／
（ｐｌ．ｂｕｓｉｎｅｓｓｍｅｎ／ˈｂＩｚｎəｓｍｅｎ；ˈ
ｂＩｚｎəｓｍəｎ／）ｎ．商界人员；企业家
（２６）
ｅｘｐｌｏｒｅ／Ｉｋˈｓｐｌɔː（ｒ）／ｖ．探索；考察；勘探
（２６）
ｃｒｏｗｄ／ｋｒａʊｄ／ｎ．人群；一伙人　ｖ．挤满（２７）
ｂｅｓｉｄｅｓ／ｂＩˈｓａＩｄｚ／ｐｒｅｐ．除……之外（还）　
ａｄｖ．而且；再说
（２７）
ｎｏｔｈｉｎｇ／ˈｎʌ􀱺􀱺Ｉ􀱻􀱻／ｐｒｏｎ．没有什么；几乎什么
也没有
（２８）
ａｎｙｂｏｄｙ／ˈｅｎｉｂɒｄｉ／；／ˈｅｎｉｂ􀱷􀱷ːｄｉ／
（ａｎｙｏｎｅ／ˈｅｎｉｗʌｎ／）ｐｒｏｎ．任何人
（２８）
ｎｏｂｏｄｙ／ˈｎəʊｂəｄｉ／ｐｒｏｎ．没有人；没有任何人
（２８）
ａｎｙｔｈｉｎｇ／ˈｅｎｉ􀱺􀱺Ｉ􀱻􀱻／ｐｒｏｎ．任何东西，任何事物
（２８）
ｈａｒｍ／ｈ􀱷􀱷ːｍ／；／ｈ􀱷􀱷ːｒｍ／ｖ．，ｎ．损害；伤害（２８）
ｓｏｍｅｗｈｅｒｅ／ˈｓʌｍｗｅə（ｒ）／；／ˈｓʌｍｗｅｒ／
ａｄｖ．在某处；到某处
（２８）
ｓｏｍｅｏｎｅ／ˈｓʌｍｗʌｎ／（ｓｏｍｅｂｏｄｙ／ˈｓʌｍｂəｄｉ／）
ｐｒｏｎ．某人
（２８）
ａｎｙｗｈｅｒｅ／ˈｅｎｉｗｅə（ｒ）／；／ˈｅｎｉｗｅｒ／
ａｄｖ．，ｐｒｏｎ．任何地方
（２８）
ｃｒｅａｔｅ／ｋｒｉˈｅＩｔ／ｖ．创造
（２８）
ｍａｇｉｃａｌ／ˈｍæｄʒＩｋｌ／ａｄｊ．有魔力的；奇妙的
（２８）
ｒｅａｌ／ˈｒｉːəｌ；ｒＩəｌ／ａｄｊ．实际存在的；真实的
（２８）
ｕｎｋｎｏｗｎ／ˌʌｎˈｎəʊｎ／ａｄｊ．未知的；无名的（２８）
ａｎｙｔｉｍｅ／ˈｅｎｉˌｔａＩｍ／ａｄｖ．在任何时候；
随便什么时候
（２８）
ｍａｇｉｃ／ˈｍæｄʒＩｋ／ａｄｊ．有魔力的；神奇的
ｎ．魔法；法术
（２８）
ｉｍｐｏｓｓｉｂｌｅ／Ｉｍˈｐɒｓəｂｌ／；／Ｉｍˈｐ􀱷􀱷ːｓəｂｌ／
ａｄｊ．不可能的
（２８）
ｃｏｎｃｅｒｔ／ˈｋɒｎｓəｔ／；／ˈｋ􀱷􀱷ːｎｓəｒｔ／ｎ．音乐会（２９）
ｓｗｅｅｔ／ｓｗｉːｔ／ａｄｊ．悦耳的；含糖的，甜的（２９）
ｆａｔ／ｆæｔ／ａｄｊ．肥的；肥胖的　ｎ．脂肪
（２９）
ａｗｆｕｌ／ˈɔːｆｌ／ａｄｊ．很坏的；极讨厌的
（２９）
ＤｅｖｅｌｏｐｉｎｇｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
ｆｏｌｋ／ｆəʊｋ／ａｄｊ．传统民间的；民俗的
（３０）
ｓｈａｐｅ／ʃｅＩｐ／ｎ．形状；外形
（３０）
ｃｈａｒａｃｔｅｒ／ˈｋæｒəｋｔə（ｒ）／ｎ．文字；人物，
角色；性格
（３０）
ｕｐｓｉｄｅ／ˈʌｐｓａＩｄ／ｎ．正面
（３０）
ｓｙｍｂｏｌ／ˈｓＩｍｂｌ／ｎ．象征；符号
（３０）
ｃｌａｙ／ｋｌｅＩ／ｎ．黏土；陶土
（３０）
ｉｍｍｅｄｉａｔｅｌｙ／Ｉˈｍｉːｄｉəｔｌｉ／ａｄｖ．立即；马上；即刻
（３１）
Words in Each Unit
140
ｍａｓｋ／ｍ􀱷􀱷ːｓｋ／；／ｍæｓｋ／ｎ．面具；面罩
（３１）
ｒｏｌｅ／ｒəʊｌ／ｎ．角色
（３１）
ｓｔｙｌｅ／ｓｔａＩｌ／ｎ．方式；作风
（３１）
ａｍｏｎｇ／əˈｍʌ􀱻􀱻／ｐｒｅｐ．在……中
（３１）
∗ｆａｎ／ｆæｎ／ｎ．粉丝；风扇
（３１）
ｐｌｅａｓａｎｔ／ˈｐｌｅｚｎｔ／ａｄｊ．愉快的；友好的
（３１）
ＷｒａｐｐｉｎｇＵｐｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
ｓｔａｄｉｕｍ／ˈｓｔｅＩｄｉəｍ／ｎ．体育场
（３３）
ｃｒｅａｔｉｖｅ／ｋｒｉˈｅＩｔＩｖ／ａｄｊ．创造（性）的；创作的（３４）
ｍｕｓｉｃｉａｎ／ｍｊｕˈｚＩʃｎ／ｎ．音乐家
（３４）
ｒｅｌａｘｅｄ／ｒＩˈｌæｋｓｔ／ａｄｊ．放松的；自在的
（３４）
ｏｐｅｒａｔｅ／ˈɒｐəｒｅＩｔ／；／ˈ􀱷􀱷ːｐəｒｅＩｔ／ｖ．操作；运转；
控制；动手术
（３４）
ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ／ｋəｎˈｔｒəʊｌ／ｎ．指挥（或控制）站；控制
ｖ．指挥；控制
（３４）
ｅｌｅｃｔｒｏｎｉｃ／ＩˌｌｅｋˈｔｒɒｎＩｋ／；／Ｉˌｌｅｋˈｔｒ􀱷􀱷ːｎＩｋ／
ａｄｊ．电子的
（３４）
ｐｈｏｔｏｇｒａｐｈｅｒ／ｆəˈｔɒｇｒəｆə（ｒ）／；／ｆəˈｔ􀱷􀱷ːｇｒəｆəｒ／
ｎ．摄影师；拍照者
（３４）
ｓｐｏｒｔｓｗｏｍａｎ／ˈｓｐɔːｔｓｗʊｍəｎ／；／ˈｓｐɔːｒｔｓｗʊｍəｎ／
（ｐｌ．ｓｐｏｒｔｓｗｏｍｅｎ／ˈｓｐɔːｔｓｗＩｍＩｎ／；
／ˈｓｐɔːｒｔｓｗＩｍＩｎ／）ｎ．女运动员
（３５）
ｓｉｎｇｅｒ／ˈｓＩ􀱻􀱻ə（ｒ）／ｎ．歌唱家；歌手
（３５）
Ｕｎｉｔ３
ＰｒｅｐａｒｉｎｇｆｏｒｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
ｃｏｕｇｈ／ｋɒｆ／；／ｋɔːｆ／ｎ．咳嗽
（３８）
ｆｅｖｅｒ／ˈｆｉːｖə（ｒ）／ｎ．发烧
（３８）
ｓｏｒｅ／ｓɔː（ｒ）／ａｄｊ．（发炎）疼痛的；酸痛的（３８）
ｔｈｒｏａｔ／􀱺􀱺ｒəʊｔ／ｎ．咽喉；喉咙
（３８）
ｈｅａｄａｃｈｅ／ˈｈｅｄｅＩｋ／ｎ．头痛
（３８）
ｔｏｏｔｈａｃｈｅ／ˈｔｕː􀱺􀱺ｅＩｋ／ｎ．牙痛
（３８）
ｓｔｏｍａｃｈａｃｈｅ／ˈｓｔʌｍəｋｅＩｋ／ｎ．胃痛
（３８）
ｔｅｍｐｅｒａｔｕｒｅ／ˈｔｅｍｐｒəｔʃə（ｒ）／；／ˈｔｅｍｐｒəｔʃʊｒ／
ｎ．体温；温度；气温
（３８）
ｍｅｄｉｃｉｎｅ／ˈｍｅｄｓｎ／；／ˈｍｅｄＩｓｎ／ｎ．药，药物；
医学
（３８）
ｊｕｎｋｆｏｏｄｎ．垃圾食品
（３８）
ｓｌｉｍ／ｓｌＩｍ／ａｄｊ．苗条的
（３９）
ｄｉｅｔ／ˈｄａＩəｔ／ｎ．日常饮食
（３９）
ｓｃｒｅｅｎ／ｓｋｒｉːｎ／ｎ．屏幕；荧屏
（３９）
ｓｕｇａｒ／ˈʃʊｇə（ｒ）／ｎ．糖；食糖
（３９）
ａｃｈｅ／ｅＩｋ／ｎ．（身体某部位的）疼痛
（４０）
ｅｘａｍｉｎｅ／ＩｇˈｚæｍＩｎ／ｖ．检查，检验；审查（４０）
ｈａｍｂｕｒｇｅｒ／ˈｈæｍｂɜːｇə（ｒ）／；／ˈｈæｍｂɜːｒｇəｒ／
ｎ．汉堡包
（４０）
ｃｈｉｐ／ｔʃＩｐ／ｎ．炸薯条
（４０）
ｆｒｉｅｄ／ｆｒａＩｄ／ａｄｊ．油炸的
（４０）
ｐｏｒｋ／ｐɔːｋ／；／ｐɔːｒｋ／ｎ．猪肉
（４０）
ｐｅｐｐｅｒ／ˈｐｅｐə（ｒ）／ｎ．胡椒粉
（４０）
ｉｃｅｄ／ａＩｓｔ／ａｄｊ．冰镇的；加冰块的
（４０）
Ｃｏｋｅ／ｋəʊｋ／ｎ．可乐
（４０）
ｐｉｌｌ／ｐＩｌ／ｎ．药丸；药片
（４０）
ＥｘｐｌｏｒｉｎｇｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
ｏｕｔｇｏｉｎｇ／ˌａʊｔˈｇəʊＩ􀱻􀱻／ａｄｊ．外向的；友好的；
爱交际的
（４２）
ｓｈｙ／ʃａＩ／ａｄｊ．羞怯的；腼腆的
（４２）
ｓｎａｃｋ／ｓｎæｋ／ｎ．点心；小吃；快餐
（４２）
Words in Each Unit 141
ｃｈｏｃｏｌａｔｅ／ˈｔʃɒｋｌəｔ／；／ˈｔʃɔːｋｌəｔ／ｎ．巧克力
（４２）
ｃｏｏｋｉｅ／ˈｋʊｋｉ／ｎ．曲奇饼
（４２）
∗ｉｃｅｃｒｅａｍ／ˈａＩｓｋｒｉːｍ／；／ˌａＩｓˈｋｒｉːｍ／
ｎ．冰激凌
（４２）
ｃｒｅａｍ／ｋｒｉːｍ／ｎ．奶油
（４２）
ｊｏｇｇｉｎｇ／ˈｄʒɒｇＩ􀱻􀱻／；／ˈｄʒ􀱷􀱷ːｇＩ􀱻􀱻／ｎ．慢跑锻炼
（４３）
ｌａｚｙ／ˈｌｅＩｚｉ／ａｄｊ．懒惰的；懒散的
（４３）
ｃｏｎｄｉｔｉｏｎ／ｋəｎˈｄＩʃｎ／ｎ．健康状况；状态；状况
（４３）
ｕｎｃｏｍｆｏｒｔａｂｌｅ／ʌｎˈｋʌｍｆｔəｂｌ／ａｄｊ．使人不舒服的；
令人不舒适的
（４３）
ｄｉａｒｙ／ˈｄａＩəｒｉ／ｎ．日记；日记簿
（４４）
ｐｏｓｉｔｉｖｅ／ˈｐɒｚəｔＩｖ／；／ˈｐ􀱷􀱷ːｚəｔＩｖ／ａｄｊ．积极
乐观的；积极的；正面的
（４４）
ｂｅｎｅｆｉｔ／ˈｂｅｎＩｆＩｔ／ｎ．益处；优势
（４４）
ｍｏｏｄ／ｍｕːｄ／ｎ．心情；情绪
（４４）
ｖｏｌｌｅｙｂａｌｌ／ˈｖɒｌｉｂɔːｌ／；／ˈｖ􀱷􀱷ːｌｉｂɔːｌ／ｎ．排球运动
（４４）
ｅｎｅｒｇｙ／ˈｅｎəｄʒｉ／；／ˈｅｎəｒｄʒｉ／ｎ．精力；能源；能量
（４４）
ｇｌａｄ／ｇｌæｄ／ａｄｊ．高兴；愉快
（４５）
ｃｏｎｆｉｄｅｎｔ／ˈｋɒｎｆＩｄəｎｔ／；／ˈｋ􀱷􀱷ːｎｆＩｄəｎｔ／
ａｄｊ．自信的；有把握的
（４５）
ａｂｓｅｎｔ／ˈæｂｓəｎｔ／ａｄｊ．缺席；不在
（４５）
ｍｏｍｅｎｔ／ˈｍəʊｍəｎｔ／ｎ．片刻；瞬间
（４５）
ｏｎｅｓｅｌｆ／ｗʌｎˈｓｅｌｆ／ｐｒｏｎ．自己；亲自
（４５）
ｓｅｅｍ／ｓｉːｍ／ｖ．好像，似乎
（４６）
ｕｎｈｅａｌｔｈｙ／ʌｎˈｈｅｌ􀱺􀱺ｉ／ａｄｊ．不健康的
（４６）
ｅｍｐｔｙ／ˈｅｍｐｔｉ／ａｄｊ．空的；无意义的
（４６）
ｓｔｏｍａｃｈ／ˈｓｔʌｍəｋ／ｎ．胃
（４６）
ｌｉｖｉｎｇ／ˈｌＩｖＩ􀱻􀱻／ｎ．生活方式　ａｄｊ．生活的；
活着的
（４６）
ｎｏｎｓｅｎｓｅ／ˈｎɒｎｓｎｓ／；／ˈｎ􀱷􀱷ːｎｓｅｎｓ／ｎ．胡扯；
谬论；胡言乱语
（４６）
ｉｍｐｒｏｐｅｒ／Ｉｍˈｐｒɒｐə（ｒ）／；／Ｉｍˈｐｒ􀱷􀱷ːｐəｒ／ａｄｊ．
不正确的；不适当的；不诚实的
（４６）
ｃｌｅａｒｌｙ／ˈｋｌＩəｌｉ／；／ˈｋｌＩｒｌｉ／ａｄｖ．明显地；清楚地，
清晰地
（４６）
ｓｌｅｅｐｙ／ˈｓｌｉːｐｉ／ａｄｊ．困倦的；瞌睡的
（４６）
ｗｏｒｓｅ／ｗɜːｓ／；／ｗɜːｒｓ／ａｄｊ．更差的；更糟的；
更坏的
（４６）
ｒｉｄ／ｒＩｄ／ｖ．摆脱
（４６）
ｆｒｉｄｇｅ／ｆｒＩｄʒ／（ｒｅｆｒｉｇｅｒａｔｏｒ／ｒＩˈｆｒＩｄʒəｒｅＩｔə（ｒ）／）
ｎ．冰箱
（４７）
ｗｅｉｇｈｔ／ｗｅＩｔ／ｎ．重量
（４７）
ＤｅｖｅｌｏｐｉｎｇｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
∗ｐｏｔａｔｏ／ｐəˈｔｅＩｔəʊ／ｎ．马铃薯；土豆
（４８）
ｃｏｒｎ／ｋɔːｎ／；／ｋɔːｒｎ／ｎ．玉米；（小麦等）
谷物
（４８）
∗ｃａｎｄｙ／ˈｋæｎｄｉ／ｎ．糖果；巧克力；一块糖
（或巧克力）
（４８）
ｂｉｓｃｕｉｔ／ˈｂＩｓｋＩｔ／ｎ．饼干
（４８）
ｂｅｅｆ／ｂｉːｆ／ｎ．牛肉
（４８）
ｃｕｃｕｍｂｅｒ／ˈｋｊｕːｋʌｍｂə（ｒ）／ｎ．黄瓜
（４８）
ｌｉｆｅｓｔｙｌｅ／ˈｌａＩｆｓｔａＩｌ／ｎ．生活方式；工作方式
（４９）
ｐｒｅｆｅｒ／ｐｒＩˈｆɜː（ｒ）／ｖ．较喜欢；喜欢……
多于……
（４９）
ｂｅａｎ／ｂｉːｎ／ｎ．豆；豆荚
（４９）
Words in Each Unit
142
ｔｈｏｕｇｈ／ðəʊ／ｃｏｎｊ．虽然；尽管；即使
（４９）
ＷｒａｐｐｉｎｇＵｐｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
ｍｅｔｈｏｄ／ˈｍｅ􀱺􀱺əｄ／ｎ．方法；办法；措施
（５２）
ｆｏｃｕｓ／ˈｆəʊｋəｓ／ｖ．集中（注意力、精力等于）
ｎ．中心点；关注
（５２）
ｓｍｅｌｌ／ｓｍｅｌ／ｎ．气味；嗅觉
（５２）
ｍｏｓｔｌｙ／ˈｍəʊｓｔｌｉ／ａｄｖ．通常；主要地；一般地
（５２）
ｓａｕｃｅ／ｓɔːｓ／ｎ．调味汁；酱
（５２）
ｓｅｒｖｅ／ｓɜːｖ／；／ｓɜːｒｖ／ｖ．端上；接待；服务
（５２）
ｈｏｂｂｙ／ˈｈɒｂｉ／；／ˈｈ􀱷􀱷ːｂｉ／ｎ．业余爱好
（５２）
∗ｈｕｒｒｙ／ˈｈʌｒｉ／；／ˈｈɜːｒｉ／ｎ．匆忙；急忙
ｖ．匆忙，急忙（做某事）
（５２）
ｍａｄ／ｍæｄ／ａｄｊ．很生气；气愤
（５２）
ｆｉｔ／ｆＩｔ／ａｄｊ．健壮的；健康的
（５３）
ｐｈｙｓｉｃａｌ／ˈｆＩｚＩｋｌ／ａｄｊ．身体的
（５３）
ｂａｌａｎｃｅｄ／ˈｂæｌəｎｓｔ／ａｄｊ．保持（或显示）平衡的
（５３）
ｒｕｎｎｅｒ／ˈｒʌｎə（ｒ）／ｎ．奔跑的人（或动物）（５３）
ｓｐｒｅａｄ／ｓｐｒｅｄ／ｖ．，ｎ．蔓延；扩散
（５３）
Ｕｎｉｔ４
ＰｒｅｐａｒｉｎｇｆｏｒｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
ｖｉｓｉｏｎ／ˈｖＩʒｎ／ｎ．视力；视野
（５６）
ｔｏｕｃｈ／ｔʌｔʃ ／ｎ．触觉；触感　ｖ．触摸；碰
（５６）
ｓｏｆｔ／ｓɒｆｔ／；／ｓɔːｆｔ／ａｄｊ．轻柔的；柔软的（５６）
ｃａｌｍ／ｋ􀱷􀱷ːｍ／ａｄｊ．镇静的；沉着的　ｖ．使平静
（５６）
ｆｏｏｌ／ｆｕːｌ／ｎ．蠢人　ａｄｊ．傻的；愚蠢的
（５６）
ｒｅｇｒｅｔ／ｒＩˈｇｒｅｔ／ｖ．感到遗憾；懊悔
（５６）
ｂｒｅａｔｈ／ｂｒｅ􀱺􀱺／ｎ．一次吸入的空气
（５６）
ｕｐｓｅｔ／ˌʌｐˈｓｅｔ／ａｄｊ．难过；失望；沮丧
ｖ．使烦恼；使生气
（５６）
ｎｅｒｖｏｕｓ／ˈｎɜːｖəｓ／；／ˈｎɜːｒｖəｓ／ａｄｊ．焦虑的；
担忧的
（５６）
ｓｅｎｓｅ／ｓｅｎｓ／ｖ．感觉到；意识到；觉察出
ｎ．感觉官能；意义，含义
（５７）
ｆｌｕ／ｆｌｕː／ｎ．流感
（５７）
Ｃｈｉｎａｔｏｗｎ／ˈｔʃａＩｎəｔａʊｎ／ｎ．唐人街
（５７）
ｆｉｒｅｗｏｒｋ／ˈｆａＩəｗɜːｋ／；／ˈｆａＩəｒｗɜːｒｋ／ｎ．烟火；
烟花
（５７）
ｋｅｅｐｅｒ／ˈｋｉːｐə（ｒ）／ｎ．保管人
（５７）
ｌｏｎｅｌｙ／ˈｌəʊｎｌｉ／ａｄｊ．孤独的；寂寞的
（５７）
ｐｕｓｈ／ｐʊʃ ／ｖ．推动；推进
（５８）
ｓｎａｋｅ／ｓｎｅＩｋ／ｎ．蛇
（５８）
ｍｉｓｓ／ｍＩｓ／ｖ．错过；思念
（５８）
ｒｅｃｏｍｍｅｎｄ／ˌｒｅｋəˈｍｅｎｄ／ｖ．推荐；举荐；介绍
（５８）
ＥｘｐｌｏｒｉｎｇｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
ｌａｕｇｈ／ｌ􀱷􀱷ːｆ／；／ｌæｆ／ｖ．笑
（６０）
ｈａｐｐｉｌｙ／ˈｈæｐＩｌｉ／ａｄｖ．快乐地；幸运地
（６０）
ｐｅｒｉｏｄ／ˈｐＩəｒｉəｄ／；／ˈｐＩｒｉəｄ／ｎ．一段时间；时期
（６１）
ｔｅｅｎａｇｅ／ˈｔｉːｎｅＩｄʒ ／ａｄｊ．青少年的；十几岁的
（６１）
ｓｔａｇｅ／ｓｔｅＩｄʒ ／ｎ．阶段；舞台
（６１）
ｐｕｒｐｏｓｅ／ˈｐɜːｐəｓ／；／ˈｐɜːｒｐəｓ／ｎ．意图；目的
（６１）
Words in Each Unit 143
ｔｅｅｎａｇｅｒ／ˈｔｉːｎｅＩｄʒə（ｒ）／ｎ．青少年
（６１）
ｒｅａｃｈ／ｒｉːｔʃ／ｖ．达到；到达；够得着
（６１）
ａｄｕｌｔ／əˈｄʌｌｔ；ˈæｄʌｌｔ／ａｄｊ．成年的；发育
成熟的　ｎ．成年人
（６１）
ｈｅｉｇｈｔ／ｈａＩｔ／ｎ．身高；高度
（６１）
∗ｈａｉｒ／ｈｅə（ｒ）／；／ｈｅｒ／ｎ．体毛；头发
（６１）
ｃｅｒｔａｉｎ／ˈｓɜːｔｎ／；／ˈｓɜːｒｔｎ／ａｄｊ．特定的；无疑的；
确实的
（６１）
ａｒｅａ／ˈｅəｒｉə ／；／ˈｅｒｉə ／ｎ．部位；面积；地区，
地域
（６１）
ｐａｉｎ／ｐｅＩｎ／ｎ．痛苦；苦恼；烦恼；疼痛
（６１）
ｓｃｈｏｏｌｗｏｒｋ／ˈｓｋｕːｌｗɜːｋ／；／ˈｓｋｕːｌｗɜːｒｋ／
ｎ．学校作业；课堂作业
（６１）
ｓｔｒｅｓｓ／ｓｔｒｅｓ／ｎ．精神压力；心理负担
（６１）
ｐｒｅｓｓｕｒｅ／ˈｐｒｅʃə（ｒ）／ｎ．心理压力，紧张；压力
（６１）
ｄｅａｌ／ｄｉːｌ／ｖ．对待；对付
（６１）
ｆｉｒｓｔｌｙ／ˈｆɜːｓｔｌｉ／；／ˈｆɜːｒｓｔｌｉ／ａｄｖ．（用于列举）
首先，第一
（６１）
ｃｏｍｐａｒｅ／ｋəｍˈｐｅə（ｒ）／；／ｋəｍˈｐｅｒ／ｖ．比较；
对比
（６１）
ｓｈｉｎｅ／ʃａＩｎ／ｖ．出色；发光
（６１）
ｄｉｓｃｏｖｅｒ／ｄＩˈｓｋʌｖə（ｒ）／ｖ．认识到；发现（６１）
ｍｅｍｏｒｙ／ˈｍｅｍəｒｉ／ｎ．回忆；记忆；记忆力；
记性
（６２）
ｊｕｎｉｏｒ／ˈｄʒｕːｎｉə（ｒ）／ａｄｊ．为１１或１３岁
以下儿童设立的；地位低下的
（６２）
ｊｕｎｉｏｒｈｉｇｈｓｃｈｏｏｌ（美国和加拿大）初级中学
（６２）
ｔｒｏｕｂｌｅ／ˈｔｒʌｂｌ／ｎ．问题；困难；困境
（６２）
∗ｅｍａｉｌ／ˈｉːｍｅＩｌ／ｎ．电子邮件　ｖ．（给……）发
电子邮件
（６２）
ｄｅｔａｉｌ／ˈｄｉːｔｅＩｌ／ｎ．细节；详情
（６２）
ａｄｖｉｓｅ／əｄˈｖａＩｚ／ｖ．劝告；建议
（６２）
ｃｏｎｇｒａｔｕｌａｔｉｏｎ／ｋəｎˌｇｒæｔʃəˈｌｅＩʃｎ／ｎ．祝贺；
恭贺
（６２）
ｄｉｓａｐｐｏｉｎｔｅｄ／ˌｄＩｓəˈｐɒＩｎｔＩｄ／ａｄｊ．失望的；
沮丧的
（６２）
ｈｏｎｅｓｔ／ˈɒｎＩｓｔ／；／ˈ􀱷􀱷ːｎＩｓｔ／ａｄｊ．坦诚的；诚实的
（６２）
ｇａｔｈｅｒ／ˈｇæðə（ｒ）／ｖ．收拢；聚集；集合；搜集
（６２）
ｃｏｕｒａｇｅ／ˈｋʌｒＩｄʒ ／；／ˈｋɜːｒＩｄʒ ／ｎ．勇气；勇敢
（６２）
ｓｐａｒｅ／ｓｐｅə（ｒ）／；／ｓｐｅｒ／ｖ．抽出；留出
　ａｄｊ．空闲的；空余的
（６２）
ｃｅｌｌｐｈｏｎｅ／ˈｓｅｌｆəʊｎ／ｎ．手机；移动电话
（６４）
ｂｏｓｓ／ｂɒｓ／；／ｂɔːｓ／ｎ．老板
（６４）
ｃａｒｅｌｅｓｓ／ˈｋｅəｌəｓ／；／ˈｋｅｒｌəｓ／ａｄｊ．粗心的；
不小心的；不仔细的
（６４）
ｊｏｙ／ｄʒɔＩ／ｎ．喜悦；乐趣
（６４）
ｃｏｍｆｏｒｔａｂｌｅ／ˈｋʌｍｆｔəｂｌ／ａｄｊ．舒服的，安逸的；
舒适的；自在的
（６４）
ｓｍｏｋｅ／ｓｍəʊｋ／ｖ．吸烟　ｎ．烟；吸烟
（６４）
ｙｏｕｔｈ／ｊｕː􀱺􀱺／ｎ．青年时期（尤指成年以前）；
年轻；青年
（６４）
ｍｉｇｈｔ／ｍａＩｔ／ｍｏｄａｌｖ．可能
（６４）
ｂａｔｈｒｏｏｍ／ˈｂ􀱷􀱷ː􀱺􀱺ｒʊｍ／；／ˈｂæ􀱺􀱺ｒʊｍ／ｎ．浴室（６５）
ｊｏｇ／ｄʒɒｇ／；／ｄʒ􀱷􀱷ːｇ／ｖ．慢跑
（６５）
ｐｏｓｔｃａｒｄ／ˈｐəʊｓｔｋ􀱷􀱷ːｄ／；／ˈｐəʊｓｔｋ􀱷􀱷ːｒｄ／
ｎ．明信片
（６５）
Words in Each Unit
144
ＤｅｖｅｌｏｐｉｎｇｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
ｂａｎｄ／ｂæｎｄ／ｎ．乐队
（６６）
ｔｉｃｋｅｔ／ˈｔＩｋＩｔ／ｎ．票，券
（６６）
ｃｒａｚｙ／ˈｋｒｅＩｚｉ／ａｄｊ．热衷的；狂热的
（６６）
ｓｕｒｐｒｉｓｅｄ／ｓəˈｐｒａＩｚｄ／；／ｓəｒˈｐｒａＩｚｄ／
ａｄｊ．惊奇的；惊讶的
（６６）
ｇａｉｎ／ｇｅＩｎ／ｖ．获得；赢得；增加
（６７）
ａｒｇｕｅ／ˈ􀱷􀱷ːｇｊｕː／；／ˈ􀱷􀱷ːｒｇｊｕː／ｖ．争论；争吵；争辩
（６７）
ｌｕｃｋｉｌｙ／ˈｌʌｋＩｌｉ／ａｄｖ．幸好；幸运地
（６７）
ｎｏｔｉｃｅ／ˈｎəʊｔＩｓ／ｖ．注意到；注意
（６７）
ｒｅｌａｔｉｏｎｓｈｉｐ／ｒＩˈｌｅＩʃｎʃＩｐ／ｎ．关系；联系；关联
（６７）
ａｃｃｅｐｔ／əｋˈｓｅｐｔ／ｖ．接受
（６７）
ａｎｙｍｏｒｅ／ˌｅｎｉˈｍɔː（ｒ）／；／ˌｅｎｉˈｍɔːｒ／
ａｄｖ．再也（不）；（不）再
（６７）
ＷｒａｐｐｉｎｇＵｐｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
ｒｅｖｉｅｗ／ｒＩˈｖｊｕː ／ｖ．，ｎ．复习
（７０）
∗ｒｏｂｏｔ／ˈｒəʊｂɒｔ／；／ˈｒəʊｂ􀱷􀱷ːｔ／ｎ．机器人（７０）
ｓｉｍｉｌａｒ／ˈｓＩｍəｌə（ｒ）／ａｄｊ．相仿的；类似的（７１）
ｍａｎａｇｅ／ˈｍæｎＩｄʒ ／ｖ．完成（困难的事）；
成功获得；管理
（７１）
ａｖｏｉｄ／əˈｖɔＩｄ／ｖ．避免；防止
（７１）
ｂａｌａｎｃｅ／ˈｂæｌəｎｓ／ｎ．平衡
（７１）
Ｕｎｉｔ５
ＰｒｅｐａｒｉｎｇｆｏｒｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
ｎｅｓｔ／ｎｅｓｔ／ｎ．鸟巢；鸟窝
（７４）
Ｍｏｕｎｔ／ｍａʊｎｔ／ｎ．山；山峰（在现代英语里
仅用于地名）
（７４）
ｌｉｅ／ｌａＩ／ｖ．位于；坐落在；躺；平躺
（７４）
ｐｒｏｖｉｎｃｅ／ˈｐｒɒｖＩｎｓ／；／ˈｐｒ􀱷􀱷ːｖＩｎｓ／ｎ．省份（７４）
ｅａｓｔ／ｉːｓｔ／ｎ．东；东方
（７４）
ｃｅｒｅｍｏｎｙ／ˈｓｅｒəｍəｎｉ／；／ˈｓｅｒəｍəʊｎｉ／ｎ．仪式；
典礼
（７４）
Ｏｌｙｍｐｉｃｓ／əˈｌＩｍｐＩｋｓ／ｎ．奥林匹克运动会；
奥运会
（７４）
ｃｅｎｔｒａｌ／ˈｓｅｎｔｒəｌ／ａｄｊ．在中心的；中央的（７４）
ｓｏｕｔｈ⁃ｅａｓｔ／ˌｓａʊ􀱺􀱺ˈｉːｓｔ／ｎ．东南；东南方；东南
地区
（７４）
ｙｅｔ／ｊｅｔ／ｃｏｎｊ．但是；然而
（７５）
ｑｕｉｔｅ／ｋｗａＩｔ／ａｄｖ．十分，非常；相当
（７５）
ａｌｒｅａｄｙ／ɔːｌˈｒｅｄｉ／ａｄｖ．已经；早已
（７５）
ｓｏｕｔｈ⁃ｗｅｓｔ／ˌｓａʊ􀱺􀱺ˈｗｅｓｔ／ａｄｊ．西南部的
ｎ．西南方；西南地区
（７６）
ｌｅｎｇｔｈ／ｌｅ􀱻􀱻ｋ􀱺􀱺／ｎ．长；长度
（７６）
ｒｏｕｎｄ／ｒａʊｎｄ／ａｄｊ．圆形的；环形的
ａｄｖ．旋转；环绕
（７６）
ｐａｌａｃｅ／ˈｐæｌəｓ／ｎ．王宫；宫殿
（７６）
ＥｘｐｌｏｒｉｎｇｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
ｌｏｔｕｓ／ˈｌəʊｔəｓ／ｎ．莲属植物
（７８）
ｒｉｃｈ／ｒＩｔʃ／ａｄｊ．丰富多彩的；富有的；油腻的（７８）
ｃｕｌｔｕｒｅ／ˈｋʌｌｔʃə（ｒ）／ｎ．文化
（７８）
ｃｕｌｔｕｒａｌ／ˈｋʌｌｔʃəｒəｌ／ａｄｊ．文化的；与文化
有关的
（７８）
ｉｎｔｅｒｅｓｔ／ˈＩｎｔｒəｓｔ；ˈＩｎｔｒｅｓｔ／ｎ．吸引力；兴趣
（７８）
ａｖｅｒａｇｅ／ˈæｖəｒＩｄʒ ／ｎ．平均数　ａｄｊ．平均的
（７８）
Words in Each Unit 145
ｓａｙｉｎｇ／ˈｓｅＩＩ􀱻􀱻／ｎ．谚语；格言
（７８）
ｈｅａｖｅｎ／ˈｈｅｖｎ／ｎ．天堂
（７８）
ａｂｏｖｅ／əˈｂʌｖ／ａｄｖ．在（或向）上面
ｐｒｅｐ．在（或向）……上面
（７８）
ｂｅｌｏｗ／ｂＩˈｌəʊ／ａｄｖ．在（或到）下面
ｐｒｅｐ．在（或到）……下面
（７８）
ｌａｎｄｓｃａｐｅ／ˈｌæｎｄｓｋｅＩｐ／ｎ．风景，景色
（７８）
ｂｒｏｋｅｎ／ˈｂｒəʊｋəｎ／ａｄｊ．破损的；残缺的
（７８）
ｔｒａｖｅｌｅｒ／ˈｔｒæｖəｌə（ｒ）／ｎ．旅行者；旅客；游客
（７８）
∗ｂｉｃｙｃｌｅ／ˈｂａＩｓＩｋｌ／ｎ．（ｂｉｋｅ／ｂａＩｋ／）自行车
（７８）
ｌａｎｄｍａｒｋ／ˈｌæｎｄｍ􀱷􀱷ːｋ／；／ˈｌæｎｄｍ􀱷􀱷ːｒｋ／ｎ．地标
（７９）
ｗｈｏｌｅ／ｈəʊｌ／ａｄｊ．全部的；整体的
（７９）
ｍａｔｅｒｉａｌ／ｍəˈｔＩəｒｉəｌ／；／ｍəˈｔＩｒｉəｌ／ｎ．材料
（７９）
ｓｔｒｕｃｔｕｒｅ／ˈｓｔｒʌｋｔʃə（ｒ）／ｎ．结构体；（尤指）
建筑物；结构；构造
（７９）
ｓｕｒｅｌｙ／ˈʃʊəｌｉ／；／ˈʃʊｒｌｉ／ａｄｖ．无疑；必定；想必
（７９）
ｐｅｒｆｏｒｍｉｎｇａｒｔｓｎ．（ｐｌ．）表演艺术
（７９）
ｓａｉｌ／ｓｅＩｌ／ｖ．航行　ｎ．帆
（７９）
ｄｉｎｉｎｇ／ˈｄａＩｎＩ􀱻􀱻／ｎ．用餐
（７９）
ｖａｃａｔｉｏｎ／ｖｅＩˈｋｅＩʃｎ；ｖəˈｋｅＩʃｎ／ｎ．（学校的）
假期
（８０）
ｆｉｅｌｄ／ｆｉːｌｄ／ｎ．田；地；场地
（８０）
ｔｅｒｒａｃｅ／ˈｔｅｒəｓ／ｎ．梯田；排屋；阳台
（８０）
∗ｐｉｇ／ｐＩｇ／ｎ．猪
（８０）
ｍｅｓｓａｇｅ／ˈｍｅｓＩｄʒ ／ｎ．信息，消息
ｖ．发即时信息
（８０）
ｖｉｅｗ／ｖｊｕː／ｎ．景色，风景；视野
（８１）
ｃｏｕｎｔｒｙｓｉｄｅ／ˈｋʌｎｔｒｉｓａＩｄ／ｎ．乡村
（８１）
ｓｙｓｔｅｍ／ˈｓＩｓｔəｍ／ｎ．系统；体制
（８１）
ｕｎｕｓｕａｌ／ʌｎˈｊｕːʒｕəｌ；ʌｎˈｊｕːʒəｌ／ａｄｊ．特别的，
不寻常的
（８１）
ｌｅａｎ／ｌｉːｎ／ｖ．倾斜
（８２）
ｆｉｘ／ｆＩｋｓ／ｖ．修理；校正
（８２）
ｂａｓｅ／ｂｅＩｓ／ｎ．底部，根基；基地
（８２）
ｆｉｒｍ／ｆɜːｍ／；／ｆɜːｒｍ／ａｄｊ．牢固的，稳固的；
坚固的
（８２）
∗ｂｅａｃｈ／ｂｉːｔʃ ／ｎ．海滩；沙滩
（８３）
ｈｏｓｔｅｓｓ／ˈｈəʊｓｔəｓ／ｎ．女房东；女主持人
（８３）
ｅｘｐｅｃｔ／Ｉｋˈｓｐｅｋｔ／ｖ．期待；预计；要求；指望（８３）
ｗａｒｎ／ｗɔːｎ／；／ｗɔːｒｎ／ｖ．劝告；警告；告诫（８３）
ｆｏｒｗａｒｄ／ˈｆɔːｗəｄ／；／ˈｆɔːｒｗəｒｄ／ａｄｖ．往后；向前
（８３）
ＤｅｖｅｌｏｐｉｎｇｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
∗Ｉｎｄｉａｎ／ˈＩｎｄｉəｎ／ａｄｊ．印度的
（８４）
ｅｎｅｍｙ／ˈｅｎəｍｉ／ｎ．敌人；仇人；反对者
（８５）
ｓｔｏｎｅ／ｓｔəʊｎ／ｎ．石头
（８５）
ｓｏｌｄｉｅｒ／ˈｓəʊｌｄʒə（ｒ）／ｎ．军人；（尤指）士兵
（８５）
ｑｕｉｃｋｌｙ／ˈｋｗＩｋｌｉ／ａｄｖ．迅速地；很快地
（８５）
ｗａｔｃｈｔｏｗｅｒ／ˈｗɒｔʃｔａʊə（ｒ）／；／ˈｗ􀱷􀱷ːｔʃｔａʊəｒ／
ｎ．瞭望塔；岗楼
（８５）
ｗｉｓｄｏｍ／ˈｗＩｚｄəｍ／ｎ．智慧；才智
（８５）
ｔｒａｄｅ／ｔｒｅＩｄ／ｎ．贸易
（８５）
ｒｏｕｔｅ／ｒｕːｔ／；／ｒａｕʊｔ／ｎ．路线；路途；常规路线
（８５）
Ｔ⁃ｓｈｉｒｔ／ˈｔｉː ʃɜːｔ／；／ˈｔｉː ʃɜːｒｔ／ｎ．Ｔ恤衫（８５）
Words in Each Unit
146
ｎａｔｉｏｎ／ˈｎｅＩʃｎ／ｎ．国家；民族
（８５）
ＷｒａｐｐｉｎｇＵｐｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
ｓｉｔｅ／ｓａＩｔ／ｎ．地点，位置；现场；站点
（８７）
ｅｍｐｅｒｏｒ／ˈｅｍｐəｒə（ｒ）／ｎ．皇帝
（８７）
ｗｉｆｅ／ｗａＩｆ／（ｐｌ．ｗｉｖｅｓ／ｗａＩｖｚ／）ｎ．妻子（８７）
ｅｍｐｒｅｓｓ／ˈｅｍｐｒəｓ／ｎ．皇后；女皇
（８７）
ｖｉｓｉｔｏｒ／ˈｖＩｚＩｔə（ｒ）／ｎ．来访者；游客
（８７）
∗ｔｅａ／ｔｉː／ｎ．茶（水）；茶叶
（８８）
ｇｏｖｅｒｎｍｅｎｔ／ˈｇʌｖəｎｍəｎｔ／；／ˈｇʌｖəｒｎｍəｎｔ／
ｎ．政府
（８８）
ｐｒｏｔｅｃｔｉｏｎ／ｐｒəˈｔｅｋʃｎ／ｎ．保护；防卫
（８８）
Ｒｏｍａｎ／ˈｒəʊｍəｎ／ｎ．古罗马人；（现代的）
罗马人　ａｄｊ．古罗马的；罗马的
（８９）
ｎｏｒｔｈｗｅｓｔｎ．西北；西北方；西北地区
（８９）
ｆｉｎｉｓｈ／ˈｆＩｎＩʃ ／ｖ．完成；做好
（８９）
ｔｈｉｃｋ／􀱺􀱺Ｉｋ／ａｄｊ．茂密的；厚的
（８９）
ｆｌａｔ／ｆｌæｔ／ａｄｊ．平坦的；平的
（８９）
ｎａｔｕｒａｌ／ˈｎæｔʃｒəｌ／ａｄｊ．天然的；自然的
（８９）
Ｕｎｉｔ６
ＰｒｅｐａｒｉｎｇｆｏｒｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
ｂｅｙｏｎｄ／ｂＩˈｊɒｎｄ／；／ｂＩˈｊ􀱷􀱷ːｎｄ／ａｄｖ．在另一边；
在（或向）更远处　ｐｒｅｐ．在（或向）……
较远的一边；除……之外
（９１）
ｕｎｉｖｅｒｓｅ／ˈｊｕːｎＩｖɜːｓ／；／ˈｊｕːｎＩｖɜːｒｓ／ｎ．宇宙（９２）
ｒｏｃｋｅｔ／ˈｒɒｋＩｔ／；／ˈｒ􀱷􀱷ːｋＩｔ／ｎ．火箭
（９２）
ｓａｔｅｌｌｉｔｅ／ˈｓæｔəｌａＩｔ／ｎ．卫星；人造卫星
（９２）
ｏｂｊｅｃｔ／ˈɒｂｄʒＩｋｔ／；／ˈ􀱷􀱷ːｂｄʒＩｋｔ／ｎ．物体；对象；
目标；宾语
（９２）
ｓｏｌａｒ／ˈｓəʊｌə（ｒ）／ａｄｊ．太阳的；太阳能的（９２）
ｗａｒｍｔｈ／ｗɔːｍ􀱺􀱺／；／ｗɔːｒｍ􀱺􀱺／ｎ．温暖；暖和；
热情
（９２）
ｍａｎ⁃ｍａｄｅ／ˌｍæｎˈｍｅＩｄ／ａｄｊ．人造的；非天然的
（９２）
ｓｕｒｆａｃｅ／ˈｓɜːｆＩｓ／；／ˈｓɜːｒｆＩｓ／ｎ．表面；表层（９３）
ｄｅｇｒｅｅ／ｄＩˈｇｒｉː／ｎ．度，度数；学位
（９３）
Ｃｅｌｓｉｕｓ／ˈｓｅｌｓｉəｓ／ａｄｊ．摄氏的
（９３）
ｅｌｅｃｔｒｉｃｉｔｙ／ＩˌｌｅｋˈｔｒＩｓəｔｉ／ｎ．电；电能
（９３）
ｈｅａｔ／ｈｉːｔ／ｎ．热量；热；高温　ｖ．加热；变热（９３）
ｓｐｏｏｎ／ｓｐｕːｎ／ｎ．勺；匙
（９４）
ｔｅｌｅｓｃｏｐｅ／ˈｔｅｌＩｓｋəʊｐ／ｎ．望远镜
（９４）
ａｐｐｅａｒ／əˈｐＩə（ｒ）／；／əˈｐＩｒ／ｖ．出现，呈现，
显现；显得
（９４）
ｈａ／ｈ􀱷􀱷ː／ｎ．哈哈（笑）
（９４）
ｄａｙｔｉｍｅ／ˈｄｅＩｔａＩｍ／ｎ．白天；日间
（９４）
ＥｘｐｌｏｒｉｎｇｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
ｄｉａｍｅｔｅｒ／ｄａＩˈæｍＩｔə（ｒ）／ｎ．直径
（９６）
ａｓｔｅｒｏｉｄ／ˈæｓｔəｒɔＩｄ／ｎ．小行星
（９６）
ｂｅｌｔ／ｂｅｌｔ／ｎ．环形地带；腰带
（９６）
ｓｅｐａｒａｔｅ／ˈｓｅｐəｒｅＩｔ／ｖ．（使）分开；划分
（９６）
ｉｎｎｅｒ／ˈＩｎə（ｒ）／ａｄｊ．接近中心的；内部的；
内心的
（９６）
ｏｕｔｅｒ／ˈａʊｔə（ｒ）／ａｄｊ．外围的；远离中心的；
外边的
（９６）
Ｍｅｒｃｕｒｙ／ˈｍɜːｋｊəｒｉ／；／ˈｍɜːｒｋｊəｒｉ／ｎ．水星（９６）
Ｖｅｎｕｓ／ˈｖｉːｎəｓ／ｎ．金星；太白星
（９６）
Ｍａｒｓ／ｍ􀱷􀱷ːｚ／；／ｍ􀱷􀱷ːｒｚ／ｎ．火星
（９６）
ｉｎｃｌｕｄｅ／Ｉｎˈｋｌｕːｄ／ｖ．包括；包含
（９６）
Words in Each Unit 147
Ｊｕｐｉｔｅｒ／ˈｄʒｕːｐＩｔə（ｒ）／ｎ．木星
（９６）
Ｓａｔｕｒｎ／ˈｓæｔɜːｎ／；／ˈｓæｔɜːｒｎ／ｎ．土星
（９６）
Ｕｒａｎｕｓ／ˈｊʊəｒəｎəｓ／；／ˈｊʊｒəｎəｓ／ｎ．天王星（９６）
Ｎｅｐｔｕｎｅ／ˈｎｅｐｔｊｕːｎ／ｎ．海王星
（９６）
ｒｏｃｋ／ｒɒｋ／；／ｒ􀱷􀱷ːｋ／ｎ．岩石；摇滚乐
（９６）
ｇａｓ／ｇæｓ／ｎ．气体；天然气
（９６）
ｉｎｓｉｄｅ／ˌＩｎˈｓａＩｄ／ａｄｖ．在（或向）里面
ｐｒｅｐ．在（或向）……里
（９６）
ｌｅａｓｔ／ｌｉːｓｔ／ａｄｖ．最少；最小
（９７）
ｐｏｗｅｒ／ˈｐａʊə（ｒ）／ｎ．能量；控制力；影响力；
电力供应
（９７）
ｍａｉｎｌｙ／ˈｍｅＩｎｌｉ／ａｄｖ．主要地；首要地
（９７）
ｎｅｉｔｈｅｒ／ˈｎｉːðəｒ；ˈｎａＩðəｒ／ａｄｖ．也不　
ｄｅｔ．，ｐｒｏｎ．两者都不
（９７）
ｎｏｒ／ｎɔː（ｒ）／ｃｏｎｊ．，ａｄｖ．也不
（９７）
ｄｉｓｔａｎｃｅ／ˈｄＩｓｔəｎｓ／ｎ．距离
（９８）
ｍｉｎｕｓ／ˈｍａＩｎəｓ／ｐｒｅｐ．零下
（９９）
ｓｕｒｖｉｖｅ／ｓəˈｖａＩｖ／；／ｓəｒˈｖａＩｖ／ｖ．生存；存活；
幸存
（９９）
ａｌｉｖｅ／əˈｌａＩｖ／ａｄｊ．活着；在世
（９９）
ｒｅｓｐｏｎｓｉｂｉｌｉｔｙ／ｒＩˌｓｐɒｎｓəˈｂＩｌəｔｉ／；／ｒＩˌｓｐ􀱷􀱷ːｎｓəˈｂＩｌəｔｉ／
ｎ．责任；负责
（１００）
ｒｅｌａｔｅｄ／ｒＩˈｌｅＩｔＩｄ／ａｄｊ．相关的；有联系的（１００）
ｅｘｐｌｏｒａｔｉｏｎ／ˌｅｋｓｐｌəˈｒｅＩʃｎ／ｎ．探索；勘探（１００）
ｄｅｖｅｌｏｐｍｅｎｔ／ｄＩˈｖｅｌəｐｍəｎｔ／ｎ．发展；开发
（１００）
ｉｎｄｕｓｔｒｙ／ˈＩｎｄəｓｔｒｉ／ｎ．工业；生产制造（１００）
ｆｉｌｌ／ｆＩｌ／ｖ．（使）充满
（１００）
ｄｕｅ／ｄｊｕː／；／ｄｕː／ａｄｊ．由于；因为
（１００）
ｄｅａｔｈ／ｄｅ􀱺􀱺／ｎ．死；死亡
（１０１）
ｖａｌｌｅｙ／ˈｖæｌｉ／ｎ．山谷
（１０１）
ｒａｉｎｆａｌｌ／ˈｒｅＩｎｆɔːｌ／ｎ．降雨量；下雨
（１０１）
ｌｏｗ／ｌəʊ／ａｄｊ．低的
（１０１）
ＤｅｖｅｌｏｐｉｎｇｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
ｒｉｓｅ／ｒａＩｚ／ｖ．升起；上升
（１０２）
ａｌｔｈｏｕｇｈ／ɔːｌˈðəʊ／ｃｏｎｊ．虽然；尽管；即便（１０３）
ｃｏｍｍｏｎ／ˈｋɒｍəｎ／；／ˈｋ􀱷􀱷ːｍəｎ／ｎ．公地
ａｄｊ．共有的，共同的；普遍的
（１０３）
ＷｒａｐｐｉｎｇＵｐｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
ｆｉｌｅ／ｆａＩｌ／ｎ．档案；卷宗；文件夹
（１０５）
ｂｏｒｎ／ｂɔːｎ／；／ｂɔːｒｎ／ｖ．出生
（１０６）
ｐｕｂｌｉｓｈ／ˈｐʌｂｌＩʃ ／ｖ．（使）发表；出版
（１０６）
ｐｒｏｖｅ／ｐｒｕːｖ／ｖ．证明；证实
（１０６）
ｓｔｒａｎｇｅ／ｓｔｒｅＩｎｄʒ ／ａｄｊ．奇怪的；奇特的（１０６）
ｃｏｍｅｔ／ˈｋɒｍＩｔ／；／ˈｋ􀱷􀱷ːｍＩｔ／ｎ．彗星
（１０６）
ｓｎｏｗｂａｌｌ／ˈｓｎəʊｂɔːｌ／ｎ．雪球
（１０６）
Ｐｌｕｔｏ／ˈｐｌｕːｔəʊ／ｎ．冥王星
（１０７）
ｆｒｅｅｚｅ／ｆｒｉːｚ／ｖ．（使）冻结，结冰
（１０７）
ｂｅｉｎｇ／ˈｂｉːＩ􀱻􀱻／ｎ．生物；存在
（１０７）
说明：本词汇表音标根据《牛津高阶英汉双解词典（第１０版）》标注。
Vocabulary
148
Ｖｏｃａｂｕｌａｒｙ
注：星号词为小学阶段已学过的二级词，黑体词为《英语课程标准（２０２２
年版）》要求初中阶段应学习和掌握的基本词，白体词为课文中只要求理解的拓
展词。
Ａ
ａｂｏｖｅ／əˈｂʌｖ／ａｄｖ．在（或向）上面
ｐｒｅｐ．在（或向）……上面
（７８）
ａｂｓｅｎｔ／ˈæｂｓəｎｔ／ａｄｊ．缺席；不在
（４５）
ａｃｃｅｐｔ／əｋˈｓｅｐｔ／ｖ．接受
（６７）
ａｃｃｏｒｄｉｎｇ（ｔｏ）／əˈｋɔːｄＩ􀱻􀱻ｔｕ／；／əˈｋɔːｒｄＩ􀱻􀱻ｔｕ／
据（……所说）；按（……所报道）
（９）
ａｃｈｅ／ｅＩｋ／ｎ．（身体某部位的）疼痛
（４０）
ａｃｈｉｅｖｅ／əˈｔʃｉːｖ／ｖ．（凭长期努力）达到
（某目标、地位、标准）；完成；成功
（１２）
ａｃｔ／æｋｔ／ｎ．行为；行动；所为ｖ．扮演；行动
（９）
ａｃｔｏｒ／ˈæｋｔə（ｒ）／ｎ．演员
（３）
ａｃｔｒｅｓｓ／ˈæｋｔｒəｓ／ｎ．女演员
（３）
ａｄｕｌｔ／əˈｄʌｌｔ；ˈæｄʌｌｔ／ａｄｊ．成年的；发育
成熟的　ｎ．成年人
（６１）
ａｄｖｉｓｅ／əｄˈｖａＩｚ／ｖ．劝告；建议
（６２）
ａｆｒａｉｄ／əˈｆｒｅＩｄ／ａｄｊ．害怕；担心
（２４）
ａｌａｒｍ／əˈｌ􀱷􀱷ːｍ／；／əˈｌ􀱷􀱷ːｒｍ／ｎ．警报；闹铃
（７）
ａｌｉｖｅ／əˈｌａＩｖ／ａｄｊ．活着；在世
（９９）
ａｌｌｏｗ／əˈｌａʊ／ｖ．允许；使可能
（２４）
ａｌｒｅａｄｙ／ɔːｌˈｒｅｄｉ／ａｄｖ．已经；早已
（７５）
ａｌｔｈｏｕｇｈ／ɔːｌˈðəʊ／ｃｏｎｊ．虽然；尽管；即便
（１０３）
ａｍａｚｉｎｇ／əˈｍｅＩｚＩ􀱻􀱻／ａｄｊ．令人大为惊奇的；
（尤指）令人惊喜的
（２６）
ａｍｏｎｇ／əˈｍʌ􀱻􀱻／ｐｒｅｐ．在……中
（３１）
ａｎｃｉｅｎｔ／ˈｅＩｎʃəｎｔ／ａｄｊ．古代的；古老的
（２１）
ａｎｙｂｏｄｙ／ˈｅｎｉｂɒｄｉ／；／ˈｅｎｉｂ􀱷􀱷ːｄｉ／
（ａｎｙｏｎｅ／ˈｅｎｉｗʌｎ／）ｐｒｏｎ．任何人
（２８）
ａｎｙｍｏｒｅ／ˌｅｎｉˈｍɔː（ｒ）／；／ˌｅｎｉˈｍɔːｒ／
ａｄｖ．再也（不）；（不）再
（６７）
ａｎｙｔｈｉｎｇ／ˈｅｎｉ􀱺􀱺Ｉ􀱻􀱻／ｐｒｏｎ．任何东西，任何事物
（２８）
ａｎｙｔｉｍｅ／ˈｅｎｉˌｔａＩｍ／ａｄｖ．在任何时候；
随便什么时候
（２８）
ａｎｙｗｈｅｒｅ／ˈｅｎｉｗｅə（ｒ）／；／ˈｅｎｉｗｅｒ／
ａｄｖ．，ｐｒｏｎ．任何地方
（２８）
ａｐｐｅａｒ／əˈｐＩə（ｒ）／；／əˈｐＩｒ／ｖ．出现，呈现，
显现；显得
（９４）
ａｒｅａ／ˈｅəｒｉə ／；／ˈｅｒｉə ／ｎ．部位；面积；地区，
Vocabulary 149
地域
（６１）
ａｒｇｕｅ／ˈ􀱷􀱷ːｇｊｕː／；／ˈ􀱷􀱷ːｒｇｊｕː／ｖ．争论；争吵；争辩
（６７）
ａｒｔｉｓｔ／ˈ􀱷􀱷ːｔＩｓｔ／；／ˈ􀱷􀱷ːｒｔＩｓｔ／ｎ．艺术家；
（尤指）画家
（２）
ａｓｔｅｒｏｉｄ／ˈæｓｔəｒɔＩｄ／ｎ．小行星
（９６）
ａｖｅｒａｇｅ／ˈæｖəｒＩｄʒ ／ｎ．平均数　ａｄｊ．平均的
（７８）
ａｖｏｉｄ／əˈｖɔＩｄ／ｖ．避免；防止
（７１）
ａｗｆｕｌ／ˈɔːｆｌ／ａｄｊ．很坏的；极讨厌的
（２９）
Ｂ
ｂａｌａｎｃｅ／ˈｂæｌəｎｓ／ｎ．平衡
（７１）
ｂａｌａｎｃｅｄ／ˈｂæｌəｎｓｔ／ａｄｊ．保持（或显示）平衡的
（５３）
ｂａｌｌｅｔ／ˈｂæｌｅＩ／；／ｂæˈｌｅＩ／ｎ．芭蕾舞剧；芭蕾舞
（２０）
ｂａｎｄ／ｂæｎｄ／ｎ．乐队
（６６）
ｂａｓｅ／ｂｅＩｓ／ｎ．底部；根基；基地
（８２）
ｂａｔｈｒｏｏｍ／ˈｂ􀱷􀱷ː􀱺􀱺ｒʊｍ／；／ˈｂæ􀱺􀱺ｒʊｍ／ｎ．浴室
（６５）
∗ｂｅａｃｈ／ｂｉːｔʃ ／ｎ．海滩；沙滩
（８３）
ｂｅａｎ／ｂｉːｎ／ｎ．豆；豆荚
（４９）
ｂｅａｔ／ｂｉːｔ／ｎ．一击，击打；节拍　ｖ．击打；打败
（２４）
ｂｅｅｆ／ｂｉːｆ／ｎ．牛肉
（４８）
ｂｅｉｎｇ／ˈｂｉːＩ􀱻􀱻／ｎ．生物；存在
（１０７）
ｂｅｌｉｅｖｅ／ｂＩˈｌｉːｖ／ｖ．相信；把（某事）当真
（３）
ｂｅｌｏｎｇ／ｂＩˈｌɒ􀱻􀱻／；／ｂＩˈｌɔː􀱻􀱻／ｖ．应在（某处）；
适应
（２４）
ｂｅｌｏｗ／ｂＩˈｌəʊ／ａｄｖ．在（或到）下面
ｐｒｅｐ．在（或到）……下面
（７８）
ｂｅｌｔ／ｂｅｌｔ／ｎ．环形地带；腰带
（９６）
ｂｅｎｅｆｉｔ／ˈｂｅｎＩｆＩｔ／ｎ．益处；优势
（４４）
ｂｅｓｉｄｅｓ／ｂＩˈｓａＩｄｚ／ｐｒｅｐ．除……之外（还）　
ａｄｖ．而且；再说
（２７）
ｂｅｙｏｎｄ／ｂＩˈｊɒｎｄ／；／ｂＩˈｊ􀱷􀱷ːｎｄ／ａｄｖ．在另一边；
在（或向）更远处　ｐｒｅｐ．在（或向）……
较远的一边；除……之外
（９１）
∗ｂｉｃｙｃｌｅ／ˈｂａＩｓＩｋｌ／ｎ．（ｂｉｋｅ／ｂａＩｋ／）自行车
（７８）
ｂｉｓｃｕｉｔ／ˈｂＩｓｋＩｔ／ｎ．饼干
（４８）
ｂｌｉｎｄ／ｂｌａＩｎｄ／ａｄｊ．瞎的；失明的
（６）
ｂｏｒｉｎｇ／ˈｂɔːｒＩ􀱻􀱻／ａｄｊ．没趣的；令人厌倦
（或厌烦）的
（１７）
ｂｏｒｎ／ｂɔːｎ／；／ｂɔːｒｎ／ｖ．出生
（１０６）
ｂｏｓｓ／ｂɒｓ／；／ｂɔːｓ／ｎ．老板
（６４）
ｂｒａｖｅ／ｂｒｅＩｖ／ａｄｊ．勇敢的
（７）
ｂｒｅａｔｈ／ｂｒｅ􀱺􀱺／ｎ．一次吸入的空气
（５６）
ｂｒｏｋｅｎ／ˈｂｒəʊｋəｎ／ａｄｊ．破损的；残缺的（７８）
ｂｕｉｌｄｅｒ／ˈｂＩｌｄə（ｒ）／ｎ．建筑工人
（２）
ｂｕｓｉｎｅｓｓｍａｎ／ˈｂＩｚｎəｓｍæｎ；ˈｂＩｚｎəｓｍəｎ／
（ｐｌ．ｂｕｓｉｎｅｓｓｍｅｎ／ˈｂＩｚｎəｓｍｅｎ；ˈ
ｂＩｚｎəｓｍəｎ／）ｎ．商界人员；企业家
（２６）
Ｃ
ｃａｌｌｉｇｒａｐｈｅｒ／ｋəˈｌＩｇｒəｆə（ｒ）／ｎ．书法家
（２０）
ｃａｌｌｉｇｒａｐｈｙ／ｋəˈｌＩｇｒəｆｉ／ｎ．书法；书法艺术（２０）
ｃａｌｍ／ｋ􀱷􀱷ːｍ／ａｄｊ．镇静的；沉着的　ｖ．使平静
（５６）
∗ｃａｎｄｙ／ˈｋæｎｄｉ／ｎ．糖果；巧克力；一块糖
（或巧克力）
（４８）
Vocabulary
150
ｃａｒｅｌｅｓｓ／ˈｋｅəｌəｓ／；／ˈｋｅｒｌəｓ／ａｄｊ．粗心的；
不小心的；不仔细的
（６４）
ｃｅｌｌｐｈｏｎｅ／ˈｓｅｌｆəʊｎ／ｎ．手机；移动电话
（６４）
Ｃｅｌｓｉｕｓ／ˈｓｅｌｓｉəｓ／ａｄｊ．摄氏的
（９３）
ｃｅｎｔｉｍｅｔｒｅ／ˈｓｅｎｔＩｍｉːｔə（ｒ）／（ｃｅｎｔｉｍｅｔｅｒＡｍＥ）
ｎ．厘米
（２６）
ｃｅｎｔｒａｌ／ˈｓｅｎｔｒəｌ／ａｄｊ．在中心的；中央的（７４）
ｃｅｎｔｕｒｙ／ˈｓｅｎｔʃəｒｉ／ｎ．百年；世纪
（２０）
ｃｅｒｅｍｏｎｙ／ˈｓｅｒəｍəｎｉ／；／ˈｓｅｒəｍəʊｎｉ／ｎ．仪式；
典礼
（７４）
ｃｅｒｔａｉｎ／ˈｓɜːｔｎ／；／ˈｓɜːｒｔｎ／ａｄｊ．特定的；无疑的；
确实的
（６１）
ｃｈａｌｌｅｎｇｅ／ˈｔʃæｌＩｎｄʒ ／ｎ．挑战
（１３）
ｃｈａｎｃｅ／ｔʃ􀱷􀱷ːｎｓ／；／ｔʃæｎｓ／ｎ．机会；机遇（４５）
ｃｈａｒａｃｔｅｒ／ˈｋæｒəｋｔə（ｒ）／ｎ．文字；人物，
角色；性格
（３０）
Ｃｈｉｎａｔｏｗｎ／ˈｔʃａＩｎəｔａʊｎ／ｎ．唐人街
（５７）
ｃｈｉｐ／ｔʃＩｐ／ｎ．炸薯条
（４０）
ｃｈｏｃｏｌａｔｅ／ˈｔʃɒｋｌəｔ／；／ˈｔʃɔːｋｌəｔ／ｎ．巧克力（４２）
ｃｈｏｏｓｅ／ｔʃｕːｚ／ｖ．选择；挑选
（１１）
ｃｌａｓｓｉｃ／ˈｋｌæｓＩｋ／ａｄｊ．最优秀的；有代表性的；
传统的
（２０）
ｃｌａｙ／ｋｌｅＩ／ｎ．黏土；陶土
（３０）
ｃｌｅａｒｌｙ／ˈｋｌＩəｌｉ／；／ˈｋｌＩｒｌｉ／ａｄｖ．明显地；清楚地，
清晰地
（４６）
Ｃｏｋｅ／ｋəʊｋ／ｎ．可乐
（４０）
ｃｏｍｅｔ／ˈｋɒｍＩｔ／；／ˈｋ􀱷􀱷ːｍＩｔ／ｎ．彗星
（１０６）
ｃｏｍｆｏｒｔａｂｌｅ／ˈｋʌｍｆｔəｂｌ／ａｄｊ．舒服的，安逸的；
舒适的；自在的
（６４）
ｃｏｍｍｏｎ／ˈｋɒｍəｎ／；／ˈｋ􀱷􀱷ːｍəｎ／ｎ．公地
ａｄｊ．共有的，共同的；普遍的
（１０３）
ｃｏｍｍｕｎｉｃａｔｅ／ｋəˈｍｊｕːｎＩｋｅＩｔ／ｖ．交流；沟通
（２４）
ｃｏｍｐａｒｅ／ｋəｍˈｐｅə（ｒ）／；／ｋəｍˈｐｅｒ／ｖ．比较；
对比
（６１）
ｃｏｍｐｅｔｉｔｉｏｎ／ˌｋɒｍｐəˈｔɪʃｎ／；／ˌｋ􀱷􀱷ːｍｐəˈｔɪʃｎ／
ｎ．比赛；竞赛
（１１）
ｃｏｎｃｅｒｔ／ˈｋɒｎｓəｔ／；／ˈｋ􀱷􀱷ːｎｓəｒｔ／ｎ．音乐会（２９）
ｃｏｎｄｉｔｉｏｎ／ｋəｎˈｄＩʃｎ／ｎ．健康状况；状态；状况
（４３）
ｃｏｎｆｉｄｅｎｔ／ˈｋɒｎｆＩｄəｎｔ／；／ˈｋ􀱷􀱷ːｎｆＩｄəｎｔ／
ａｄｊ．自信的；有把握的
（４５）
ｃｏｎｇｒａｔｕｌａｔｉｏｎ／ｋəｎˌｇｒæｔʃəˈｌｅＩʃｎ／ｎ．祝贺；
恭贺
（６２）
ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ／ｋəｎˈｔｒəʊｌ／ｎ．指挥（或控制）站；控制
ｖ．指挥；控制
（３４）
ｃｏｎｖｅｒｓａｔｉｏｎ／ˌｋɒｎｖəˈｓｅＩʃｎ／；／ˌｋ􀱷􀱷ːｎｖəｒˈｓｅＩʃｎ／
ｎ．交谈，谈话
（１７）
ｃｏｏｋｉｅ／ˈｋʊｋｉ／ｎ．曲奇饼
（４２）
ｃｏｒｎ／ｋɔːｎ／；／ｋɔːｒｎ／ｎ．玉米；（小麦等）
谷物
（４８）
ｃｏｒｒｅｃｔ／ｋəˈｒｅｋｔ／ａｄｊ．准确无误的；正确的（２２）
ｃｏｕｇｈ／ｋɒｆ／；／ｋɔːｆ／ｎ．咳嗽
（３８）
ｃｏｕｎｔｒｙｓｉｄｅ／ˈｋʌｎｔｒｉｓａＩｄ／ｎ．乡村
（８１）
ｃｏｕｒａｇｅ／ˈｋʌｒＩｄʒ ／；／ˈｋɜːｒＩｄʒ ／ｎ．勇气；勇敢
（６２）
ｃｏｕｒｓｅ／ｋɔːｓ／；／ｋɔːｒｓ／ｎ．课程；进程
（１１）
ｃｒａｚｙ／ˈｋｒｅＩｚｉ／ａｄｊ．热衷的；狂热的
（６６）
ｃｒｅａｍ／ｋｒｉːｍ／ｎ．奶油
（４２）
ｃｒｅａｔｅ／ｋｒｉˈｅＩｔ／ｖ．创造
（２８）
ｃｒｅａｔｉｖｅ／ｋｒｉˈｅＩｔＩｖ／ａｄｊ．创造（性）的；创作的
（３４）
Vocabulary 151
ｃｒｏｗｄ／ｋｒａʊｄ／ｎ．人群；一伙人　ｖ．挤满（２７）
ｃｕｃｕｍｂｅｒ／ˈｋｊｕːｋʌｍｂə（ｒ）／ｎ．黄瓜
（４９）
ｃｕｌｔｕｒｅ／ˈｋʌｌｔʃə（ｒ）／ｎ．文化
（７８）
ｃｕｌｔｕｒａｌ／ˈｋʌｌｔʃəｒəｌ／ａｄｊ．文化的；与文化
有关的
（７８）
ｃｕｒｉｏｕｓ／ˈｋｊʊəｒｉəｓ／；／ˈｋｊʊｒｉəｓ／ａｄｊ．求知欲
强的；好奇的
（１０）
ｃｕｓｔｏｍｅｒ／ˈｋʌｓｔəｍə（ｒ）／ｎ．顾客
（１７）
Ｄ
ｄａｎｃｅｒ／ˈｄ􀱷􀱷ːｎｓə（ｒ）／；／ˈｄæｎｓəｒ／ｎ．舞蹈演员；
跳舞者
（４）
ｄａｎｇｅｒｏｕｓ／ˈｄｅＩｎｄʒəｒəｓ／ａｄｊ．有危险的
（７）
ｄａｙｔｉｍｅ／ˈｄｅＩｔａＩｍ／ｎ．白天；日间
（９４）
ｄｅａｌ／ｄｉːｌ／ｖ．对待；对付
（６１）
ｄｅａｔｈ／ｄｅ􀱺􀱺／ｎ．死；死亡
（１０１）
ｄｅｇｒｅｅ／ｄＩˈｇｒｉː／ｎ．度，度数；学位
（９３）
ｄｅｎｔｉｓｔ／ˈｄｅｎｔＩｓｔ／ｎ．牙科医生
（１６）
ｄｅｓｉｇｎ／ｄＩˈｚａＩｎ／ｖ．设计；构思；计划
ｎ．设计；构思；设计方案
（１３）
ｄｅｔａｉｌ／ˈｄｉːｔｅＩｌ／ｎ．细节；详情
（６２）
ｄｅｖｅｌｏｐｍｅｎｔ／ｄＩˈｖｅｌəｐｍəｎｔ／ｎ．发展；开发
（１００）
ｄｉａｍｅｔｅｒ／ｄａＩˈæｍＩｔə（ｒ）／ｎ．直径
（９６）
ｄｉａｒｙ／ˈｄａＩəｒｉ／ｎ．日记；日记簿
（４４）
ｄｉｅｔ／ˈｄａＩəｔ／ｎ．日常饮食
（３９）
ｄｉｎｉｎｇ／ˈｄａＩｎＩ􀱻􀱻／ｎ．用餐
（７９）
ｄｉｒｅｃｔ／ｄəˈｒｅｋｔ；ｄａＩˈｒｅｋｔ／ｖ．导演；指挥
ａｄｊ．直接的
（１０）
ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ／ｄəˈｒｅｋʃｎ；ｄａＩˈｒｅｋʃｎ／ｎ．指导；方向
（３）
ｄｉｒｅｃｔｏｒ／ｄəˈｒｅｋｔə（ｒ）；ｄａＩˈｒｅｋｔə（ｒ）／
ｎ．导演
（２）
ｄｉｓａｐｐｏｉｎｔｅｄ／ˌｄＩｓəˈｐɒＩｎｔＩｄ／ａｄｊ．失望的；
沮丧的
（６２）
ｄｉｓｃｏｖｅｒ／ｄＩˈｓｋʌｖə（ｒ）／ｖ．认识到；发现（６１）
ｄｉｓｔａｎｃｅ／ˈｄＩｓｔəｎｓ／ｎ．距离
（９８）
ｄｒｕｍ／ｄｒʌｍ／ｎ．鼓
（２４）
ｄｕｅ／ｄｊｕː／；／ｄｕː／ａｄｊ．由于；因为
（１００）
ｄｙｎａｓｔｙ／ˈｄＩｎəｓｔｉ／；／ˈｄａＩｎəｓｔｉ／ｎ．王朝；朝代
（２６）
Ｅ
ｅａｓｔ／ｉːｓｔ／ｎ．东；东方
（７４）
ｅｌｅｃｔｒｉｃｉｔｙ／ＩˌｌｅｋˈｔｒＩｓəｔｉ／ｎ．电；电能
（９３）
ｅｌｅｃｔｒｏｎｉｃ／ＩˌｌｅｋˈｔｒɒｎＩｋ／；／Ｉˌｌｅｋˈｔｒ􀱷􀱷ːｎＩｋ／
ａｄｊ．电子的
（３４）
∗ｅｍａｉｌ／ˈｉːｍｅＩｌ／ｎ．电子邮件　ｖ．（给……）发
电子邮件
（６２）
ｅｍｐｅｒｏｒ／ˈｅｍｐəｒə（ｒ）／ｎ．皇帝
（８７）
ｅｍｐｒｅｓｓ／ˈｅｍｐｒəｓ／ｎ．皇后；女皇
（８７）
ｅｍｐｔｙ／ˈｅｍｐｔｉ／ａｄｊ．空的；无意义的
（４６）
ｅｎｃｏｕｒａｇｅ／ＩｎˈｋʌｒＩｄʒ ／；／ＩｎˈｋɜːｒＩｄʒ ／ｖ．鼓励；
激励
（１１）
ｅｎｅｍｙ／ˈｅｎəｍｉ／ｎ．敌人；仇人；反对者
（８５）
ｅｎｅｒｇｙ／ˈｅｎəｄʒｉ／；／ˈｅｎəｒｄʒｉ／ｎ．精力；能源；能量
（４４）
ｅｒａｓｅｒ／ＩˈｒｅＩｚə（ｒ）／；／ＩˈｒｅＩｓəｒ／ｎ．橡皮
（３）
ｅｓｐｅｃｉａｌｌｙ／Ｉˈｓｐｅʃəｌｉ／ａｄｖ．尤其；特别
（９）
ｅｘａｍｉｎｅ／ＩｇˈｚæｍＩｎ／ｖ．检查，检验；审查（４０）
ｅｘｃｅｌｌｅｎｔ／ˈｅｋｓəｌəｎｔ／ａｄｊ．优秀的；杰出的；
极好的
（４）
Vocabulary
152
ｅｘｐｅｃｔ／Ｉｋˈｓｐｅｋｔ／ｖ．期待；预计；要求；指望（８３）
ｅｘｐｌｏｒａｔｉｏｎ／ˌｅｋｓｐｌəˈｒｅＩʃｎ／ｎ．探索；勘探（１００）
ｅｘｐｌｏｒｅ／Ｉｋˈｓｐｌɔː（ｒ）／ｖ．探索；考察；勘探
（２６）
ｅｘｐｌｏｒｅｒ／Ｉｋˈｓｐｌɔːｒə（ｒ）／ｎ．探险者
（１０）
ｅｘｐｒｅｓｓ／Ｉｋˈｓｐｒｅｓ／ｖ．表达
（２０）
∗ｅｙｅ／ａＩ／ｎ．眼睛
（２５）
Ｆ
∗ｆａｎ／ｆæｎ／ｎ．粉丝；风扇
（３１）
ｆａｔ／ｆæｔ／ａｄｊ．肥的；肥胖的　ｎ．脂肪
（２９）
ｆｅｅｌｉｎｇ／ˈｆｉːｌＩ􀱻􀱻／ｎ．感觉，感触；情感；想法
（２４）
ｆｅｖｅｒ／ˈｆｉːｖə（ｒ）／ｎ．发烧
（３８）
ｆｉｅｌｄ／ｆｉːｌｄ／ｎ．田；地；场地
（８０）
ｆｉｌｅ／ｆａＩｌ／ｎ．档案；卷宗；文件夹
（１０５）
ｆｉｌｌ／ｆＩｌ／ｖ．（使）充满
（１００）
ｆｉｎｉｓｈ／ˈｆＩｎＩʃ ／ｖ．完成；做好
（８９）
ｆｉｒｅｍａｎ／ˈｆａＩəｍəｎ／；／ˈｆａＩəｒｍəｎ／（ｐｌ．ｆｉｒｅｍｅｎ
／ˈｆａＩəｍəｎ／；／ˈｆａＩəｒｍəｎ／）ｎ．消防队员
（７）
ｆｉｒｅｗｏｒｋ／ˈｆａＩəｗɜːｋ／；／ˈｆａＩəｒｗɜːｒｋ／ｎ．烟火；
烟花
（５７）
ｆｉｒｍ／ｆɜːｍ／；／ｆɜːｒｍ／ａｄｊ．牢固的，稳固的；
坚固的
（８２）
ｆｉｒｓｔｌｙ／ˈｆɜːｓｔｌｉ／；／ˈｆɜːｒｓｔｌｉ／ａｄｖ．（用于列举）
首先，第一
（６１）
ｆｉｔ／ｆＩｔ／ａｄｊ．健壮的；健康的
（５３）
ｆｉｘ／ｆＩｋｓ／ｖ．修理；校正
（８２）
ｆｌａｔ／ｆｌæｔ／ａｄｊ．平坦的；平的
（８９）
ｆｌｕ／ｆｌｕː／ｎ．流感
（５７）
ｆｏｃｕｓ／ˈｆəʊｋəｓ／ｖ．集中（注意力、精力等于）
ｎ．中心点；关注
（５２）
ｆｏｌｋ／ｆəʊｋ／ａｄｊ．传统民间的；民俗的
（３０）
ｆｏｏｌ／ｆｕːｌ／ｎ．蠢人　ａｄｊ．傻的；愚蠢的
（５６）
ｆｏｒｗａｒｄ／ˈｆɔːｗəｄ／；／ˈｆɔːｒｗəｒｄ／ａｄｖ．往后；向前
（８３）
ｆｒｅｅｚｅ／ｆｒｉːｚ／ｖ．（使）冻结，结冰
（１０７）
ｆｒｉｄｇｅ／ｆｒＩｄʒ／（ｒｅｆｒｉｇｅｒａｔｏｒ／ｒＩˈｆｒＩｄʒəｒｅＩｔə（ｒ）／）
ｎ．冰箱
（４７）
ｆｒｉｅｄ／ｆｒａＩｄ／ａｄｊ．油炸的
（４０）
ｆｕｔｕｒｅ／ˈｆｊｕːｔʃə（ｒ）／ｎ．将来；未来
（７）
Ｇ
ｇａｉｎ／ｇｅＩｎ／ｖ．获得；赢得；增加
（６７）
ｇａｔｈｅｒ／ˈｇæðə（ｒ）／ｖ．收拢；聚集；集合；搜集
（６２）
ｇａｓ／ｇæｓ／ｎ．气体；天然气
（９６）
ｇａｔｅ／ｇｅＩｔ／ｎ．大门；栅栏门
（２６）
ｇｌａｄ／ｇｌæｄ／ａｄｊ．高兴；愉快
（４５）
ｇｏｖｅｒｎｍｅｎｔ／ˈｇʌｖəｎｍəｎｔ／；／ˈｇʌｖəｒｎｍəｎｔ／
ｎ．政府
（８８）
∗ｇｒａｎｄｐａ／ˈｇｒæｎｐ􀱷􀱷ː／（ｇｒａｎｄｆａｔｈｅｒ
／ˈｇｒæｎｆ􀱷􀱷ːðə（ｒ）／）ｎ．爷爷；姥爷
（１０）
ｇｒｅｅｔ／ｇｒｉːｔ／ｖ．和（某人）打招呼（或问好）；
欢迎；迎接
（１７）
ｇｕｅｓｔ／ｇｅｓｔ／ｎ．客人；宾客
（１７）
ｇｕｉｄｅ／ｇａＩｄ／ｎ．导游；指南　ｖ．指引；指导
（２）
Ｈ
ｈａ／ｈ􀱷􀱷ː／ｎ．哈哈（笑）
（９４）
Vocabulary 153
∗ｈａｉｒ／ｈｅə（ｒ）／；／ｈｅｒ／ｎ．体毛；头发
（６１）
ｈａｍｂｕｒｇｅｒ／ˈｈæｍｂɜːｇə（ｒ）／；／ˈｈæｍｂɜːｒｇəｒ／
ｎ．汉堡包
（４０）
ｈａｐｐｉｌｙ／ˈｈæｐＩｌｉ／ａｄｖ．快乐地；幸运地
（６０）
ｈａｒｍ／ｈ􀱷􀱷ːｍ／；／ｈ􀱷􀱷ːｒｍ／ｖ．，ｎ．损害；伤害（２８）
ｈｅａｄａｃｈｅ／ˈｈｅｄｅＩｋ／ｎ．头痛
（３８）
ｈｅａｔ／ｈｉːｔ／ｎ．热量；热；高温　
ｖ．加热；变热
（９３）
ｈｅａｖｅｎ／ˈｈｅｖｎ／ｎ．天堂
（７８）
ｈｅｉｇｈｔ／ｈａＩｔ／ｎ．身高；高度
（６１）
ｈｏｂｂｙ／ˈｈɒｂｉ／；／ˈｈ􀱷􀱷ːｂｉ／ｎ．业余爱好
（５２）
ｈｏｎｅｓｔ／ˈɒｎＩｓｔ／；／ˈ􀱷􀱷ːｎＩｓｔ／ａｄｊ．坦诚的；诚实的
（６２）
ｈｏｓｔｅｓｓ／ˈｈəʊｓｔəｓ／ｎ．女房东；女主持人（８３）
ｈｏｗｅｖｅｒ／ｈａʊˈｅｖə（ｒ）／ａｄｖ．然而
（１３）
ｈｕｇｅ／ｈｊｕːｄʒ ／ａｄｊ．巨大的；极多的
（２６）
∗ｈｕｒｒｙ／ˈｈʌｒｉ／；／ˈｈɜːｒｉ／ｎ．匆忙；急忙
ｖ．匆忙，急忙（做某事）
（５２）
Ｉ
∗ｉｃｅｃｒｅａｍ／ˈａＩｓｋｒｉːｍ／；／ˌａＩｓˈｋｒｉːｍ／
ｎ．冰激凌
（４２）
ｉｃｅｄ／ａＩｓｔ／ａｄｊ．冰镇的；加冰块的
（４０）
ｉｌｌｎｅｓｓ／ˈＩｌｎəｓ／ｎ．（身体或精神上的）疾病，病
（１０）
ｉｍｍｅｄｉａｔｅｌｙ／Ｉˈｍｉːｄｉəｔｌｉ／ａｄｖ．立即；马上；即刻
（３１）
ｉｍｐｏｓｓｉｂｌｅ／Ｉｍˈｐɒｓəｂｌ／；／Ｉｍˈｐ􀱷􀱷ːｓəｂｌ／
ａｄｊ．不可能的
（２８）
ｉｍｐｒｏｐｅｒ／Ｉｍˈｐｒɒｐə（ｒ）／；／Ｉｍˈｐｒ􀱷􀱷ːｐəｒ／ａｄｊ．
不正确的；不适当的；不诚实的
（４６）
ｉｎｃｌｕｄｅ／Ｉｎˈｋｌｕːｄ／ｖ．包括；包含
（９６）
∗Ｉｎｄｉａｎ／ˈＩｎｄｉəｎ／ａｄｊ．印度的
（８４）
ｉｎｄｕｓｔｒｙ／ˈＩｎｄəｓｔｒｉ／ｎ．工业；生产制造（１００）
ｉｎｎｅｒ／ˈＩｎə（ｒ）／ａｄｊ．接近中心的；内部的；
内心的
（９６）
ｉｎｓｉｄｅ／ˌＩｎˈｓａＩｄ／ａｄｖ．在（或向）里面
ｐｒｅｐ．在（或向）……里
（９６）
ｉｎｓｔｒｕｍｅｎｔ／ˈＩｎｓｔｒəｍəｎｔ／ｎ．乐器；仪器；工具
（２４）
ｉｎｔｅｒｅｓｔ／ˈＩｎｔｒəｓｔ；ˈＩｎｔｒｅｓｔ／ｎ．吸引力；兴趣（７８）
ｉｎｔｅｒｅｓｔｅｄ／ˈＩｎｔｒəｓｔＩｄ；ˈＩｎｔｒｅｓｔＩｄ／
ａｄｊ．感兴趣的；关心的
（１０）
Ｊ
ｊｏｇ／ｄʒɒｇ／；／ｄʒ􀱷􀱷ːｇ／ｖ．慢跑
（６５）
ｊｏｇｇｉｎｇ／ˈｄʒɒｇＩ􀱻􀱻／；／ˈｄʒ􀱷􀱷ːｇＩ􀱻􀱻／ｎ．慢跑锻炼（４３）
ｊｏｕｒｎｅｙ／ˈｄʒɜːｎｉ／；／ˈｄʒɜːｒｎｉ／ｎ．（尤指长途）
旅行
（８）
ｊｏｙ／ｄʒɔＩ／ｎ．喜悦；乐趣
（６４）
ｊｕｎｉｏｒ／ˈｄʒｕːｎｉə（ｒ）／ａｄｊ．为１１岁或１３岁
以下儿童设立的；地位低下的
（６２）
ｊｕｎｉｏｒｈｉｇｈｓｃｈｏｏｌ（美国和加拿大）初级中学
（６２）
ｊｕｎｋｆｏｏｄｎ．垃圾食品
（３８）
Ｊｕｐｉｔｅｒ／ˈｄʒｕːｐＩｔə（ｒ）／ｎ．木星
（９６）
Ｋ
ｋｅｅｐｅｒ／ˈｋｉːｐə（ｒ）／ｎ．保管人
（５７）
ｋｅｙｂｏａｒｄ／ˈｋｉːｂɔːｄ／；／ˈｋｉːｂɔːｒｄ／ｎ．琴键；键盘
（２４）
ｋｎｏｗｌｅｄｇｅ／ˈｎɒｌＩｄʒ ／；／ˈｎ􀱷􀱷ːｌＩｄʒ ／ｎ．知识；学问
（１３）
Vocabulary
154
Ｌ
ｌａｎｄｍａｒｋ／ˈｌæｎｄｍ􀱷􀱷ːｋ／；／ˈｌæｎｄｍ􀱷􀱷ːｒｋ／ｎ．地标
（７９）
ｌａｎｄｓｃａｐｅ／ˈｌæｎｄｓｋｅＩｐ／ｎ．风景，景色
（７８）
ｌａｎｇｕａｇｅ／ˈｌæ􀱻􀱻ｇｗＩｄʒ ／ｎ．语言
（２４）
ｌａｕｇｈ／ｌ􀱷􀱷ːｆ／；／ｌæｆ／ｖ．笑
（６０）
ｌａｗｙｅｒ／ˈｌɔＩə（ｒ）／ｎ．律师
（１１）
ｌａｚｙ／ˈｌｅＩｚｉ／ａｄｊ．懒惰的；懒散的
（４３）
ｌｅａｄ／ｌｉːｄ／ｖ．带路；领路
（１７）
ｌｅａｎ／ｌｉːｎ／ｖ．倾斜
（８２）
ｌｅａｓｔ／ｌｉːｓｔ／ａｄｖ．最少；最小
（９７）
ｌｅｎｇｔｈ／ｌｅ􀱻􀱻ｋ􀱺􀱺／ｎ．长；长度
（７６）
∗ｌｅｔｔｅｒ／ˈｌｅｔə（ｒ）／ｎ．信；信件
（２）
ｌｉｅ／ｌａＩ／ｖ．位于；坐落在；躺；平躺
（７４）
ｌｉｆｅｓｔｙｌｅ／ˈｌａＩｆｓｔａＩｌ／ｎ．生活方式；工作方式（４９）
ｌｉｔｅｒａｔｕｒｅ／ˈｌＩｔｒəｔʃə（ｒ）／ｎ．文学；文学作品
（２０）
ｌｉｖｅｌｙ／ˈｌａＩｖｌｉ／ａｄｊ．活跃热情的；精力充沛的
（４）
ｌｉｖｉｎｇ／ˈｌＩｖＩ􀱻􀱻／ｎ．生活方式　ａｄｊ．生活的；
活着的
（４６）
ｌｏｎｅｌｙ／ˈｌəʊｎｌｉ／ａｄｊ．孤独的；寂寞的
（５７）
ｌｏｔｕｓ／ˈｌəʊｔəｓ／ｎ．莲属植物
（７８）
ｌｏｗ／ｌəʊ／ａｄｊ．低的
（１０１）
ｌｕｃｋｉｌｙ／ˈｌʌｋＩｌｉ／ａｄｖ．幸好；幸运地
（６７）
Ｍ
ｍａｄ／ｍæｄ／ａｄｊ．很生气；气愤
（５２）
ｍａｇｉｃ／ˈｍæｄʒＩｋ／ａｄｊ．有魔力的；神奇的
ｎ．魔法；法术
（２８）
ｍａｇｉｃａｌ／ˈｍæｄʒＩｋｌ／ａｄｊ．有魔力的；奇妙的（２８）
ｍａｉｎｌｙ／ˈｍｅＩｎｌｉ／ａｄｖ．主要地；首要地
（９７）
ｍａｎａｇｅ／ˈｍæｎＩｄʒ ／ｖ．完成（困难的事）；
成功获得；管理
（７１）
ｍａｎａｇｅｒ／ˈｍæｎＩｄʒə（ｒ）／ｎ．经理
（１７）
ｍａｎ⁃ｍａｄｅ／ˌｍæｎˈｍｅＩｄ／ａｄｊ．人造的；非天然的
（９２）
ｍａｒｋ／ｍ􀱷􀱷ːｋ／；／ｍ􀱷􀱷ːｒｋ／ｖ．标示；标明方位；
做记号　ｎ．符号；记号
（２６）
Ｍａｒｓ／ｍ􀱷􀱷ːｚ／；／ｍ􀱷􀱷ːｒｚ／ｎ．火星
（９６）
ｍａｓｋ／ｍ􀱷􀱷ːｓｋ／；／ｍæｓｋ／ｎ．面具；面罩
（３１）
ｍａｔｅｒｉａｌ／ｍəˈｔＩəｒｉəｌ／；／ｍəˈｔＩｒｉəｌ／ｎ．材料
（７９）
ｍａｙｂｅ／ˈｍｅＩｂｉ／ａｄｖ．或许
（４）
ｍｅｄｉｃｉｎｅ／ˈｍｅｄｓｎ／；／ˈｍｅｄＩｓｎ／ｎ．药，药物；
医学
（３８）
ｍｅｄｉｕｍ／ˈｍｉːｄｉəｍ／（ｐｌ．ｍｅｄｉａ／ˈｍｉːｄｉə ／）
ｎ．（传播信息等的）媒介，手段，方法
（２４）
ｍｅｍｏｒｙ／ˈｍｅｍəｒｉ／ｎ．回忆；记忆；记忆力；
记性
（６２）
Ｍｅｒｃｕｒｙ／ˈｍɜːｋｊəｒｉ／；／ˈｍɜːｒｋｊəｒｉ／ｎ．水星（９６）
ｍｅｓｓａｇｅ／ˈｍｅｓＩｄʒ ／ｎ．信息，消息
ｖ．发即时信息
（８０）
ｍｅｔｈｏｄ／ˈｍｅ􀱺􀱺əｄ／ｎ．方法；办法；措施
（５２）
ｍｉｇｈｔ／ｍａＩｔ／ｍｏｄａｌｖ．可能
（６４）
ｍｉｎｕｓ／ˈｍａＩｎəｓ／ｐｒｅｐ．零下
（９９）
ｍｉｓｓ／ｍＩｓ／ｖ．错过；思念
（５８）
ｍｏｄｅｌ／ˈｍɒｄｌ／；／ˈｍ􀱷􀱷ːｄｌ／ｎ．模型；模特儿（１３）
ｍｏｄｅｒｎ／ˈｍɒｄｎ／；／ˈｍ􀱷􀱷ːｄəｒｎ／ａｄｊ．现代的；
当代的；近代的
（７）
Vocabulary 155
ｍｏｍｅｎｔ／ˈｍəʊｍəｎｔ／ｎ．片刻；瞬间
（４５）
ｍｏｏｄ／ｍｕːｄ／ｎ．心情；情绪
（４４）
ｍｏｓｔｌｙ／ˈｍəʊｓｔｌｉ／ａｄｖ．通常；主要地；一般地
（５２）
Ｍｏｕｎｔ／ｍａʊｎｔ／ｎ．山；山峰（在现代英语里
仅用于地名）
（７４）
ｍｏｖｉｅ／ˈｍｕːｖｉ／ｎ．电影
（１０）
ｍｕｓｉｃａｌ／ˈｍｊｕːｚＩｋｌ／ａｄｊ．音乐的
（２４）
ｍｕｓｉｃｉａｎ／ｍｊｕˈｚＩʃｎ／ｎ．音乐家
（３４）
Ｎ
ｎａｔｉｏｎ／ˈｎｅＩʃｎ／ｎ．国家；民族
（８５）
ｎａｔｕｒａｌ／ˈｎæｔʃｒəｌ／ａｄｊ．天然的；自然的
（８９）
ｎｅａｒｌｙ／ˈｎＩəｌｉ／；／ˈｎＩｒｌｉ／ａｄｖ．差不多；将近（８）
ｎｅｉｔｈｅｒ／ˈｎｉːðəｒ；ˈｎａＩðəｒ／ａｄｖ．也不　
ｄｅｔ．，ｐｒｏｎ．两者都不
（９７）
Ｎｅｐｔｕｎｅ／ˈｎｅｐｔｊｕːｎ／ｎ．海王星
（９６）
ｎｅｒｖｏｕｓ／ˈｎɜːｖəｓ／；／ˈｎɜːｒｖəｓ／ａｄｊ．焦虑的；
担忧的
（５６）
ｎｅｓｔ／ｎｅｓｔ／ｎ．鸟巢；鸟窝
（７４）
ｎｅｗｓ／ｎｊｕːｚ／；／ｎｕːｚ／ｎ．新闻；消息
（４）
ｎｏｂｏｄｙ／ˈｎəʊｂəｄｉ／（ｎｏｏｎｅ）ｐｒｏｎ．没有人；
没有任何人
（２８）
ｎｏｉｓｙ／ˈｎɔＩｚｉ／ａｄｊ．吵闹的；充满噪声的
（１７）
ｎｏｎｓｅｎｓｅ／ˈｎɒｎｓｎｓ／；／ˈｎ􀱷􀱷ːｎｓｅｎｓ／ｎ．胡扯；
谬论；胡言乱语
（４６）
ｎｏｒ／ｎɔː（ｒ）／ｃｏｎｊ．，ａｄｖ．也不
（９７）
ｎｏｒｔｈｅｒｎ／ˈｎɔːðəｎ／；／ˈｎɔːｒðəｒｎ／ａｄｊ．北方的；
北部的
（２６）
ｎｏｒｔｈｗｅｓｔｎ．西北；西北方；西北地区
（８９）
ｎｏｔｈｉｎｇ／ˈｎʌ􀱺􀱺Ｉ􀱻􀱻／ｐｒｏｎ．没有什么；几乎什么
也没有
（２８）
ｎｏｔｉｃｅ／ˈｎəʊｔＩｓ／ｖ．注意到；注意
（６７）
ｎｏｖｅｌ／ˈｎɒｖｌ／；／ˈｎ􀱷􀱷ːｖｌ／ｎ．小说
（２０）
Ｏ
ｏｂｊｅｃｔ／ˈɒｂｄʒＩｋｔ／；／ˈ􀱷􀱷ːｂｄʒＩｋｔ／ｎ．物体；对象；
目标；宾语
（９２）
ｏｆｆｉｃｅｒ／ˈɒｆＩｓə（ｒ）／；／ˈ􀱷􀱷ːｆＩｓəｒ／ｎ．高级职员，
官员；军官
（１１）
ｏｉｌ／ɔＩｌ／ｎ．（绘画用）油彩；石油；原油
（２０）
Ｏｌｙｍｐｉｃｓ／əˈｌＩｍｐＩｋｓ／ｎ．奥林匹克运动会；
奥运会
（７４）
ｏｎｅｓｅｌｆ／ｗʌｎˈｓｅｌｆ／ｐｒｏｎ．自己；亲自
（４５）
ｏｐｅｒａ／ˈɒｐｒə ／；／ˈ􀱷􀱷ːｐｒə ／ｎ．歌剧
（２５）
ｏｐｅｒａｔｅ／ˈɒｐəｒｅＩｔ／；／ˈ􀱷􀱷ːｐəｒｅＩｔ／ｖ．操作；运转；
控制；动手术
（３４）
ｏｐｉｎｉｏｎ／əˈｐＩｎｊəｎ／ｎ．意见；想法
（１１）
ｏｕｔｅｒ／ˈａʊｔə（ｒ）／ａｄｊ．外围的；远离中心的；
外边的
（９６）
ｏｕｔｇｏｉｎｇ／ˌａʊｔˈｇəʊＩ􀱻􀱻／ａｄｊ．外向的；友好的；
爱交际的
（４２）
Ｐ
ｐａｉｎ／ｐｅＩｎ／ｎ．痛苦；苦恼；烦恼；疼痛
（６１）
ｐａｉｎｔ／ｐｅＩｎｔ／ｖ．用颜料画
（２）
ｐａｉｎｔｅｒ／ˈｐｅＩｎｔə（ｒ）／ｎ．画家；油漆匠
（２５）
ｐａｌａｃｅ／ˈｐæｌəｓ／ｎ．王宫；宫殿
（７６）
ｐａｔｉｅｎｔ／ˈｐｅＩʃｎｔ／ｎ．病人　ａｄｊ．有耐心的
（６）
ｐｅｐｐｅｒ／ˈｐｅｐə（ｒ）／ｎ．胡椒粉
（４０）
ｐｅｒｆｅｃｔ／ˈｐɜːｆＩｋｔ／；／ˈｐɜːｒｆＩｋｔ／ａｄｊ．完美的；
极好的
（２５）
Vocabulary
156
ｐｅｒｆｏｒｍｉｎｇａｒｔｓｎ．（ｐｌ．）表演艺术
（７９）
ｐｅｒｉｏｄ／ˈｐＩəｒｉəｄ／；／ˈｐＩｒｉəｄ／ｎ．一段时间；时期
（６１）
ｐｈｏｔｏｇｒａｐｈｅｒ／ｆəˈｔɒｇｒəｆə（ｒ）／；／ｆəˈｔ􀱷􀱷ːｇｒəｆəｒ／
ｎ．摄影师；拍照者
（３４）
ｐｈｏｔｏｇｒａｐｈｙ／ｆəˈｔɒｇｒəｆｉ／；／ｆəˈｔ􀱷􀱷ːｇｒəｆｉ／
ｎ．摄影；摄影艺术
（２１）
ｐｈｙｓｉｃａｌ／ˈｆＩｚＩｋｌ／ａｄｊ．身体的
（５３）
∗ｐｉａｎｏ／ｐｉˈæｎəʊ／ｎ．钢琴
（１０）
∗ｐｉｇ／ｐＩｇ／ｎ．猪
（８０）
ｐｉｇｅｏｎ／ˈｐＩｄʒＩｎ／ｎ．鸽子
（２５）
ｐｉｌｌ／ｐＩｌ／ｎ．药丸；药片
（４０）
ｐｉｌｏｔ／ˈｐａＩｌəｔ／ｎ．飞行员
（２）
ｐｉｏｎｅｅｒ／ˌｐａＩəˈｎＩə（ｒ）／；／ˌｐａＩəˈｎＩｒ／ｎ．先锋；
带头人；开发者
（８）
ｐｉｔｙ／ˈｐＩｔｉ／ｎ．遗憾，可惜
（２２）
ｐｌｅａｓａｎｔ／ˈｐｌｅｚｎｔ／ａｄｊ．愉快的；友好的
（３１）
Ｐｌｕｔｏ／ˈｐｌｕːｔəʊ／ｎ．冥王星
（１０７）
ｐｏｐｕｌａｒ／ˈｐɒｐｊəｌə（ｒ）／；／ˈｐ􀱷􀱷ːｐｊəｌəｒ／
ａｄｊ．大众喜爱的；广受欢迎的；
大众（化）的
（２５）
ｐｏｒｋ／ｐɔːｋ／；／ｐɔːｒｋ／ｎ．猪肉
（４０）
ｐｏｓｉｔｉｖｅ／ˈｐɒｚəｔＩｖ／；／ˈｐ􀱷􀱷ːｚəｔＩｖ／ａｄｊ．积极
乐观的；积极的；正面的
（４４）
ｐｏｓｔｃａｒｄ／ˈｐəʊｓｔｋ􀱷􀱷ːｄ／；／ˈｐəʊｓｔｋ􀱷􀱷ːｒｄ／
ｎ．明信片
（６５）
ｐｏｓｔｍａｎ／ˈｐəʊｓｔｍəｎ／（ｐｌ．ｐｏｓｔｍｅｎ
／ˈｐəʊｓｔｍəｎ／）ｎ．邮递员，邮差
（２）
∗ｐｏｔａｔｏ／ｐəˈｔｅＩｔəʊ／ｎ．马铃薯；土豆
（４８）
ｐｏｗｅｒ／ˈｐａʊə（ｒ）／ｎ．能量；控制力；影响力；
电力供应
（９７）
ｐｒｅｆｅｒ／ｐｒＩˈｆɜː（ｒ）／ｖ．较喜欢；喜欢……
多于……
（４９）
ｐｒｅｓｓｕｒｅ／ˈｐｒｅʃə（ｒ）／ｎ．心理压力，紧张；压力
（６１）
ｐｒｏｄｕｃｅ／ｐｒəˈｄｊｕːｓ／；／ｐｒəˈｄｕːｓ／ｖ．制作；拍摄
（３）
ｐｒｏｔｅｃｔｉｏｎ／ｐｒəˈｔｅｋʃｎ／ｎ．保护；防卫
（８８）
ｐｒｏｕｄ／ｐｒａʊｄ／ａｄｊ．骄傲的；自豪的
（１１）
ｐｒｏｖｅ／ｐｒｕːｖ／ｖ．证明；证实
（１０６）
ｐｒｏｖｉｎｃｅ／ˈｐｒɒｖＩｎｓ／；／ˈｐｒ􀱷􀱷ːｖＩｎｓ／ｎ．省份（７４）
ｐｕｂｌｉｓｈ／ˈｐʌｂｌＩʃ ／ｖ．（使）发表；出版
（１０６）
ｐｕｌｌ／ｐʊｌ／ｖ．拉；拖；拽
（２６）
ｐｕｒｐｏｓｅ／ˈｐɜːｐəｓ／；／ˈｐɜːｒｐəｓ／ｎ．意图；目的
（６１）
ｐｕｓｈ／ｐʊʃ ／ｖ．推动；推进
（５８）
Ｑ
ｑｕａｌｉｔｙ／ˈｋｗɒｌəｔｉ／；／ˈｋｗ􀱷􀱷ːｌəｔｉ／ｎ．人品；素质；
质量　ａｄｊ．优质的，高质量的
（９）
ｑｕｉｃｋｌｙ／ˈｋｗＩｋｌｉ／ａｄｖ．迅速地；很快地
（８５）
ｑｕｉｔｅ／ｋｗａＩｔ／ａｄｖ．十分，非常；相当
（７５）
Ｒ
ｒａｉｌｗａｙ／ˈｒｅＩｌｗｅＩ／ｎ．铁路；铁道
（６）
ｒａｉｎｆａｌｌ／ˈｒｅＩｎｆɔːｌ／ｎ．降雨量；下雨
（１０１）
ｒｅａｃｈ／ｒｉːｔʃ ／ｖ．达到；到达；够得着
（６１）
ｒｅａｄｅｒ／ˈｒｉːｄə（ｒ）／ｎ．读者
（１５）
ｒｅａｄｙ／ˈｒｅｄｉ／ａｄｊ．准备好
（８）
ｒｅａｌ／ˈｒｉːəｌ；ｒＩəｌ／ａｄｊ．实际存在的；真实的（２８）
ｒｅａｓｏｎ／ˈｒｉːｚｎ／ｎ．原因；理由
（１６）
ｒｅｃｅｉｖｅ／ｒＩˈｓｉːｖ／ｖ．受到，收到
（７）
Vocabulary 157
ｒｅｃｏｍｍｅｎｄ／ˌｒｅｋəˈｍｅｎｄ／ｖ．推荐；举荐；介绍
（５８）
ｒｅｃｏｒｄ／ˈｒｅｋɔːｄ／；／ˈｒｅｋəｒｄ／ｎ．记录；记载
／ｒＩˈｋɔːｄ／；／ｒＩˈｋɔːｒｄ／ｖ．记录；记载
（１５）
ｒｅｇｒｅｔ／ｒＩˈｇｒｅｔ／ｖ．感到遗憾；懊悔
（５６）
ｒｅｌａｔｅｄ／ｒＩˈｌｅＩｔＩｄ／ａｄｊ．相关的；有联系的（１００）
ｒｅｌａｔｉｏｎｓｈｉｐ／ｒＩˈｌｅＩʃｎʃＩｐ／ｎ．关系；联系；关联
（６７）
ｒｅｌａｘ／ｒＩˈｌæｋｓ／ｖ．（使）放松；放松精神
（或思想）
（２４）
ｒｅｌａｘｅｄ／ｒＩˈｌæｋｓｔ／ａｄｊ．放松的；自在的
（３４）
ｒｅｐｏｒｔ／ｒＩˈｐɔːｔ／；／ｒＩˈｐɔːｒｔ／ｎ．，ｖ．报道
（４）
ｒｅｐｏｒｔｅｒ／ｒＩˈｐɔːｔə（ｒ）／；／ｒＩˈｐɔːｒｔəｒ／ｎ．记者
（４）
ｒｅｓｅａｒｃｈ／ｒＩˈｓɜːｔʃ／；／ｒｉˈｓɜːｒｔʃ／ｎ．研究；调查
（１６）
ｒｅｓｐｏｎｓｉｂｉｌｉｔｙ／ｒＩˌｓｐɒｎｓəˈｂＩｌəｔｉ／；／ｒＩˌｓｐ􀱷􀱷ːｎｓəˈｂＩｌəｔｉ／
ｎ．责任；负责
（１００）
ｒｅｖｉｅｗ／ｒＩˈｖｊｕː／ｖ．，ｎ．复习
（７０）
ｒｉｃｈ／ｒＩｔʃ／ａｄｊ．丰富多彩的；富有的；油腻的（７８）
ｒｉｄ／ｒＩｄ／ｖ．摆脱
（４６）
ｒｉｓｅ／ｒａＩｚ／ｖ．升起；上升
（１０２）
ｒｉｖｅｒｂａｎｋ／ˈｒＩｖəｂæ􀱻􀱻ｋ／；／ˈｒＩｖəｒｂæ􀱻􀱻ｋ／ｎ．河堤；
河岸
（２６）
ｒｉｖｅｒｓｉｄｅ／ˈｒＩｖəｓａＩｄ／；／ˈｒＩｖəｒｓａＩｄ／ｎ．河畔；
河岸
（２６）
∗ｒｏｂｏｔ／ˈｒəʊｂɒｔ／；／ˈｒəʊｂ􀱷􀱷ːｔ／ｎ．机器人（７０）
ｒｏｃｋ／ｒɒｋ／；／ｒ􀱷􀱷ːｋ／ｎ．岩石；摇滚乐
（９６）
ｒｏｃｋｅｔ／ˈｒɒｋＩｔ／；／ˈｒ􀱷􀱷ːｋＩｔ／ｎ．火箭
（９２）
ｒｏｌｅ／ｒəʊｌ／ｎ．角色
（３１）
Ｒｏｍａｎ／ˈｒəʊｍəｎ／ｎ．古罗马人；（现代的）
罗马人　ａｄｊ．古罗马的；罗马的
（８９）
ｒｏｕｎｄ／ｒａʊｎｄ／ａｄｊ．圆形的；环形的
ａｄｖ．旋转；环绕
（７６）
ｒｏｕｔｅ／ｒｕːｔ／；／ｒａʊｔ／ｎ．路线；路途；常规路线
（８５）
ｒｕｎｎｅｒ／ˈｒʌｎə（ｒ）／ｎ．奔跑的人（或动物）（５３）
ｒｕｓｈ／ｒʌʃ ／ｖ．迅速移动
（７）
Ｓ
ｓａｉｌ／ｓｅＩｌ／ｖ．航行　ｎ．帆
（７９）
ｓａｎｄ／ｓæｎｄ／ｎ．沙；沙子
（２２）
ｓａｔｅｌｌｉｔｅ／ˈｓæｔəｌａＩｔ／ｎ．卫星；人造卫星
（９２）
Ｓａｔｕｒｎ／ˈｓæｔɜːｎ／；／ˈｓæｔɜːｒｎ／ｎ．土星
（９６）
ｓａｕｃｅ／ｓɔːｓ／ｎ．调味汁；酱
（５２）
ｓａｙｉｎｇ／ˈｓｅＩＩ􀱻􀱻／ｎ．谚语；格言
（７８）
ｓｃｈｏｏｌｗｏｒｋ／ˈｓｋｕːｌｗɜːｋ／；／ˈｓｋｕːｌｗɜːｒｋ／
ｎ．学校作业；课堂作业
（６１）
ｓｃｉｅｎｔｉｆｉｃ／ˌｓａＩəｎˈｔＩｆＩｋ／ａｄｊ．科学（上）的（１３）
ｓｃｉｅｎｔｉｓｔ／ˈｓａＩəｎｔＩｓｔ／ｎ．科学家；科研人员（２）
ｓｃｒｅｅｎ／ｓｋｒｉːｎ／ｎ．屏幕；荧屏
（３９）
ｓｅｃｒｅｔ／ˈｓｉːｋｒəｔ／ｎ．秘密
（１０）
ｓｅｅｍ／ｓｉːｍ／ｖ．好像，似乎
（４６）
ｓｅｎｄ／ｓｅｎｄ／ｖ．邮寄；发送；传达；派遣
（２）
ｓｅｎｓｅ／ｓｅｎｓ／ｖ．感觉到；意识到；觉察出
ｎ．感觉官能；意义，含义
（５７）
ｓｅｎｔｅｎｃｅ／ˈｓｅｎｔəｎｓ／ｎ．句子；判决，宣判（２５）
ｓｅｐａｒａｔｅ／ˈｓｅｐəｒｅＩｔ／ｖ．（使）分开；划分
（９６）
ｓｅｒｖｅ／ｓɜːｖ／；／ｓɜːｒｖ／ｖ．端上；接待；服务（５２）
ｓｈａｐｅ／ʃｅＩｐ／ｎ．形状；外形
（３０）
ｓｈｅｌｆ／ʃｅｌｆ／（ｐｌ．ｓｈｅｌｖｅｓ／ʃｅｌｖｚ／）ｎ．架子，搁板
（１５）
ｓｈｉｎｅ／ʃａＩｎ／ｖ．发光；出色
（６１）
Vocabulary
158
ｓｈｏｕｔ／ʃａʊｔ／ｖ．大声说；叫
（２６）
ｓｈｙ／ʃａＩ／ａｄｊ．羞怯的；腼腆的
（４２）
ｓｉｃｋ／ｓＩｋ／ａｄｊ．生病的
（４）
ｓｉｍｉｌａｒ／ˈｓＩｍəｌə（ｒ）／ａｄｊ．相仿的；类似的（７１）
ｓｉｍｐｌｅ／ˈｓＩｍｐｌ／ａｄｊ．简单的；易做的
（１７）
ｓｉｎｇｅｒ／ˈｓＩ􀱻􀱻ə（ｒ）／ｎ．歌唱家；歌手
（３５）
ｓｉｔｅ／ｓａＩｔ／ｎ．地点，位置；现场；站点
（８７）
ｓｌｅｅｐｙ／ˈｓｌｉːｐｉ／ａｄｊ．困倦的；瞌睡的
（４６）
ｓｌｉｍ／ｓｌＩｍ／ａｄｊ．苗条的
（３９）
ｓｍｅｌｌ／ｓｍｅｌ／ｎ．气味；嗅觉
（５２）
ｓｍｉｌｅ／ｓｍａＩｌ／ｎ．，ｖ．微笑
（１７）
ｓｍｏｋｅ／ｓｍəʊｋ／ｖ．吸烟　ｎ．烟；吸烟
（６４）
ｓｎａｃｋ／ｓｎæｋ／ｎ．点心；小吃；快餐
（４２）
ｓｎａｋｅ／ｓｎｅＩｋ／ｎ．蛇
（５８）
ｓｎｏｗｂａｌｌ／ˈｓｎəʊｂɔːｌ／ｎ．雪球
（１０６）
ｓｏｆａ／ˈｓəʊｆə ／ｎ．沙发
（７）
ｓｏｆｔ／ｓɒｆｔ／；／ｓɔːｆｔ／ａｄｊ．轻柔的；柔软的（５６）
ｓｏｌａｒ／ˈｓəʊｌə（ｒ）／ａｄｊ．太阳的；太阳能的（９２）
ｓｏｌｄｉｅｒ／ˈｓəʊｌｄʒə（ｒ）／ｎ．军人；（尤指）士兵
（８５）
ｓｏｍｅｏｎｅ／ˈｓʌｍｗʌｎ／（ｓｏｍｅｂｏｄｙ／ˈｓʌｍｂəｄｉ／）
ｐｒｏｎ．某人
（２８）
ｓｏｍｅｗｈｅｒｅ／ˈｓʌｍｗｅə（ｒ）／；／ˈｓʌｍｗｅｒ／
ａｄｖ．在某处；到某处
（２８）
ｓｏｒｅ／ｓɔː（ｒ）／ａｄｊ．（发炎）疼痛的；酸痛的
（３８）
ｓｏｕｔｈ⁃ｅａｓｔ／ˌｓａʊ􀱺􀱺ˈｉːｓｔ／ｎ．东南；东南方；东南
地区
（７４）
ｓｏｕｔｈ⁃ｗｅｓｔ／ˌｓａʊ􀱺􀱺ˈｗｅｓｔ／ａｄｊ．西南部的
ｎ．西南方；西南地区
（７６）
ｓｐａｃｅｓｈｉｐ／ˈｓｐｅＩｓʃＩｐ／ｎ．（航天）飞船
（８）
ｓｐａｒｅ／ｓｐｅə（ｒ）／；／ｓｐｅｒ／ｖ．抽出；留出
　ａｄｊ．空闲的；空余的
（６２）
ｓｐｅｅｃｈ／ｓｐｉːｔʃ ／ｎ．演说；讲话
（１７）
ｓｐｉｒｉｔ／ˈｓｐＩｒＩｔ／ｎ．情绪；精神
（２０）
ｓｐｏｏｎ／ｓｐｕːｎ／ｎ．勺；匙
（９４）
ｓｐｏｒｔｓｗｏｍａｎ／ˈｓｐɔːｔｓｗʊｍəｎ／；／ˈｓｐɔːｒｔｓｗʊｍəｎ／
（ｐｌ．ｓｐｏｒｔｓｗｏｍｅｎ／ˈｓｐɔːｔｓｗＩｍＩｎ／；
／ˈｓｐɔːｒｔｓｗＩｍＩｎ／）ｎ．女运动员
（３５）
ｓｐｒｅａｄ／ｓｐｒｅｄ／ｖ．，ｎ．蔓延；扩散
（５３）
ｓｔａｄｉｕｍ／ˈｓｔｅＩｄｉəｍ／ｎ．体育场
（３３）
ｓｔａｇｅ／ｓｔｅＩｄʒ ／ｎ．阶段；舞台
（６１）
ｓｔｏｍａｃｈ／ˈｓｔʌｍəｋ／ｎ．胃
（４６）
ｓｔｏｍａｃｈａｃｈｅ／ˈｓｔʌｍəｋｅＩｋ／ｎ．胃痛
（３８）
ｓｔｏｎｅ／ｓｔəʊｎ／ｎ．石头
（８５）
ｓｔｒａｎｇｅ／ｓｔｒｅＩｎｄʒ ／ａｄｊ．奇怪的；奇特的
（１０６）
ｓｔｒｅｓｓ／ｓｔｒｅｓ／ｎ．精神压力；心理负担
（６１）
ｓｔｒｉｃｔ／ｓｔｒＩｋｔ／ａｄｊ．要求严格的；严厉的；
严谨的
（２５）
ｓｔｒｉｎｇ／ｓｔｒＩ􀱻􀱻／ｎ．弦
（２４）
ｓｔｒｕｃｔｕｒｅ／ˈｓｔｒʌｋｔʃə（ｒ）／ｎ．结构体；（尤指）
建筑物；结构；构造
（７９）
ｓｔｙｌｅ／ｓｔａＩｌ／ｎ．方式；作风
（３１）
ｓｕｃｃｅｅｄ／ｓəｋˈｓｉːｄ／ｖ．成功；实现目标
（８）
ｓｕｃｃｅｓｓ／ｓəｋˈｓｅｓ／ｎ．成功；胜利
（１１）
ｓｕｃｃｅｓｓｆｕｌ／ｓəｋˈｓｅｓｆｌ／ａｄｊ．获得成功的；
有成就的
（１７）
ｓｕｇａｒ／ˈʃʊｇə（ｒ）／ｎ．糖；食糖
（３９）
ｓｕｒｅｌｙ／ˈʃʊəｌｉ／；／ˈʃʊｒｌｉ／ａｄｖ．无疑；必定；想必
（７９）
ｓｕｒｆａｃｅ／ˈｓɜːｆＩｓ／；／ˈｓɜːｒｆＩｓ／ｎ．表面；表层
（９３）
Vocabulary 159
ｓｕｒｐｒｉｓｅｄ／ｓəˈｐｒａＩｚｄ／；／ｓəｒˈｐｒａＩｚｄ／
ａｄｊ．惊奇的；惊讶的
（６６）
ｓｕｒｖｉｖｅ／ｓəˈｖａＩｖ／；／ｓəｒˈｖａＩｖ／ｖ．生存；
存活；幸存
（９９）
ｓｗａｎ／ｓｗɒｎ／；／ｓｗ􀱷􀱷ːｎ／ｎ．天鹅
（２０）
ｓｗｅｅｔ／ｓｗｉːｔ／ａｄｊ．悦耳的；含糖的，甜的（２９）
ｓｙｍｂｏｌ／ˈｓＩｍｂｌ／ｎ．象征；符号
（３０）
ｓｙｓｔｅｍ／ˈｓＩｓｔəｍ／ｎ．系统；体制
（８１）
Ｔ
ｔａｉｋｏｎａｕｔ／ˈｔａＩｋəｎɔｔ；ˈｔａＩｋəˌｎɔːｔ／ｎ．（中国的）
航天员
（８）
∗ｔｅａ／ｔｉː／ｎ．茶（水）；茶叶
（８８）
ｔｅａｈｏｕｓｅ／ˈｔｉːｈａʊｓ／ｎ．茶馆
（２０）
ｔｅｅｎａｇｅ／ˈｔｉːｎｅＩｄʒ ／ａｄｊ．青少年的；十几岁的
（６１）
ｔｅｅｎａｇｅｒ／ˈｔｉːｎｅＩｄʒə（ｒ）／ｎ．青少年
（６１）
ｔｅｌｅｓｃｏｐｅ／ˈｔｅｌＩｓｋəʊｐ／ｎ．望远镜
（９４）
ｔｅｍｐｅｒａｔｕｒｅ／ˈｔｅｍｐｒəｔʃə（ｒ）／；／ˈｔｅｍｐｒəｔʃʊｒ／
ｎ．体温；温度；气温
（３８）
ｔｅｒｍ／ｔɜːｍ／；／ｔɜːｒｍ／ｎ．学期
（１７）
ｔｅｒｒａｃｅ／ˈｔｅｒəｓ／ｎ．梯田；排屋；阳台
（８０）
ｔｈａｎｋｓ／􀱺􀱺æ􀱻􀱻ｋｓ／ｅｘｃｌ．谢谢，多谢　ｎ．感谢；
谢意
（４）
ｔｈｉｃｋ／􀱺􀱺Ｉｋ／ａｄｊ．茂密的；厚的
（８９）
ｔｈｏｕｇｈ／ðəʊ／ｃｏｎｊ．虽然；尽管；即使
（４９）
ｔｈｒｏａｔ／􀱺􀱺ｒəʊｔ／ｎ．咽喉；喉咙
（３８）
ｔｉｃｋｅｔ／ˈｔＩｋＩｔ／ｎ．票，券
（６６）
ｔｉｎｙ／ˈｔａＩｎｉ／ａｄｊ．极小的；微小的
（８）
∗ｔｏｍｏｒｒｏｗ／ｔəˈｍɒｒəʊ／；／ｔəˈｍ􀱷􀱷ːｒəʊ／
ａｄｖ．在明天；在明日　ｎ．明天；明日（１１）
ｔｏｏｌ／ｔｕːｌ／ｎ．工具
（３）
ｔｏｏｔｈａｃｈｅ／ˈｔｕː􀱺􀱺ｅＩｋ／ｎ．牙痛
（３８）
ｔｏｕｃｈ／ｔʌｔʃ ／ｎ．触觉；触感　ｖ．触摸；碰
（５６）
ｔｏｕｒｉｓｔ／ˈｔʊəｒＩｓｔ／；／ˈｔʊｒＩｓｔ／ｎ．游客
（１６）
ｔｏｗｅｒ／ˈｔａʊə（ｒ）／ｎ．塔；塔楼
（２６）
ｔｒａｄｅ／ｔｒｅＩｄ／ｎ．贸易
（８５）
ｔｒａｉｎｉｎｇ／ˈｔｒｅＩｎＩ􀱻􀱻／ｎ．训练；培训
（８）
ｔｒａｖｅｌｅｒ／ˈｔｒæｖəｌə（ｒ）／ｎ．旅行者；
旅客；游客
（７８）
ｔｒｏｕｂｌｅ／ˈｔｒʌｂｌ／ｎ．问题；困难；困境
（６２）
ｔｒｕｍｐｅｔ／ˈｔｒʌｍｐＩｔ／ｎ．小号；喇叭
（２４）
Ｔ⁃ｓｈｉｒｔ／ˈｔｉː ʃɜːｔ／；／ˈｔｉː ʃɜːｒｔ／ｎ．Ｔ恤衫（８５）
ｔｙｐｅ／ˈｔａＩｐ／ｎ．类型，种类；典型；字体
ｖ．打字
（２４）
Ｕ
ｕｎｃｏｍｆｏｒｔａｂｌｅ／ʌｎˈｋʌｍｆｔəｂｌ／ａｄｊ．使人不舒服的；
令人不舒适的
（４３）
ｕｎｈｅａｌｔｈｙ／ʌｎˈｈｅｌ􀱺􀱺ｉ／ａｄｊ．不健康的
（４６）
ｕｎｉｆｏｒｍ／ˈｊｕːｎＩｆɔːｍ／；／ˈｊｕːｎＩｆɔːｒｍ／ｎ．制服；
校服
（７）
ｕｎｉｖｅｒｓｅ／ˈｊｕːｎＩｖɜːｓ／；／ˈｊｕːｎＩｖɜːｒｓ／ｎ．宇宙
（９２）
ｕｎｋｎｏｗｎ／ˌʌｎˈｎəʊｎ／ａｄｊ．未知的；无名的（２８）
ｕｎｕｓｕａｌ／ʌｎˈｊｕːʒｕəｌ；ʌｎˈｊｕːʒəｌ／ａｄｊ．特别的，
不寻常的
（８１）
ｕｐｓｅｔ／ˌʌｐˈｓｅｔ／ａｄｊ．难过；失望；沮丧
ｖ．使烦恼；使生气
（５６）
ｕｐｓｉｄｅ／ˈʌｐｓａＩｄ／ｎ．正面
（３０）
Ｕｒａｎｕｓ／ˈｊʊəｒəｎəｓ／；／ˈｊʊｒəｎəｓ／ｎ．天王星（９６）
Vocabulary
160
Ｖ
ｖａｃａｔｉｏｎ／ｖｅＩˈｋｅＩʃｎ；ｖəˈｋｅＩʃｎ／ｎ．（学校的）
假期
（８０）
ｖａｌｌｅｙ／ˈｖæｌｉ／ｎ．山谷
（１０１）
ｖａｌｕｅ／ˈｖæｌｊｕː／ｖ．重视；珍视　ｎ．价值
（２６）
Ｖｅｎｕｓ／ˈｖｉːｎəｓ／ｎ．金星；太白星
（９６）
ｖｅｔ／ｖｅｔ／ｎ．兽医
（４）
ｖｉｅｗ／ｖｊｕː／ｎ．景色，风景；视野
（８１）
ｖｉｏｌｉｎ／ˌｖａＩəˈｌＩｎ／ｎ．小提琴
（２４）
ｖｉｓｉｏｎ／ˈｖＩʒｎ／ｎ．视力；视野
（５６）
ｖｉｓｉｔｏｒ／ˈｖＩｚＩｔə（ｒ）／ｎ．来访者；游客
（８７）
ｖｏｌｌｅｙｂａｌｌ／ˈｖɒｌｉｂɔːｌ／；／ˈｖ􀱷􀱷ːｌｉｂɔːｌ／ｎ．排球运动
（４４）
ｖｏｔｅ／ｖəʊｔ／ｖ．投票；选出
（１１）
Ｗ
ｗａｉｔｒｅｓｓ／ˈｗｅＩｔｒəｓ／ｎ．女服务员
（１７）
ｗａｒｍｔｈ／ｗɔːｍ􀱺􀱺／；／ｗɔːｒｍ􀱺􀱺／ｎ．温暖；暖和；
热情
（９２）
ｗａｒｎ／ｗɔːｎ／；／ｗɔːｒｎ／ｖ．劝告；警告；告诫
（８３）
ｗａｔｃｈｔｏｗｅｒ／ˈｗɒｔʃｔａʊə（ｒ）／；／ˈｗ􀱷􀱷ːｔʃｔａʊəｒ／
ｎ．瞭望塔；岗楼
（８５）
ｗｅｉｇｈｔ／ｗｅＩｔ／ｎ．重量
（４７）
ｗｅｓｔ／ｗｅｓｔ／ｎ．西；西方　ａｄｊ．西方的；西部的；
向西的
（２０）
ｗｈｏｌｅ／ｈəʊｌ／ａｄｊ．全部的；整体的
（７９）
ｗｉｆｅ／ｗａＩｆ／（ｐｌ．ｗｉｖｅｓ／ｗａＩｖｚ／）ｎ．妻子（８７）
ｗｉｓｄｏｍ／ˈｗＩｚｄəｍ／ｎ．智慧；才智
（８５）
ｗｉｔｈｏｕｔ／ｗＩˈðａʊｔ／ｐｒｅｐ．没有；缺乏
（８）
ｗｏｏｄ／ｗʊｄ／ｎ．木；木头；木柴
（２２）
ｗｏｒｓｅ／ｗɜːｓ／；／ｗɜːｒｓ／ａｄｊ．更差的；更糟的；
更坏的
（４６）
ｗｏｗ／ｗａʊ／ｅｘｃｌ．哇，呀
（２２）
Ｙ
ｙｅｔ／ｊｅｔ／ｃｏｎｊ．但是；然而
（７５）
ｙｏｕｔｈ／ｊｕː􀱺􀱺／ｎ．青年时期（尤指成年以前）；
年轻；青年
（６４）
Ｚ
ｚｏｏｋｅｅｐｅｒ／ˈｚｕːｋｉːｐə（ｒ）／ｎ．动物园管理员
（１２）
Useful Expressions in Each Unit 161
ＵｓｅｆｕｌＥｘｐｒｅｓｓｉｏｎｓｉｎＥａｃｈＵｎｉｔ
Ｕｎｉｔ１
ｓｈｏｗ．．．ａｒｏｕｎｄ领……参观
（２）
ｇｅｔｓｉｃｋ生病；患病
（４）
ｔｈａｎｋｓｔｏ幸亏；由于
（４）
ｃａｒｅａｂｏｕｔ关注；关心
（７）
ｉｎｏｎｅ􀆳􀆳ｓｍｉｎｄ在某人的心中
（７）
ｂｅｏｎｆｉｒｅ着火；失火
（７）
ｐｕｔｏｕｔ扑灭，熄灭；扔掉；出版
（７）
ｐａｙｏｆｆ成功，奏效；付清
（８）
ａｓｌｏｎｇａｓ只要
（８）
ａｃｃｏｒｄｉｎｇｔｏ根据；依照
（９）
ｂｅ／ｂｅｃｏｍｅｉｎｔｅｒｅｓｔｅｄｉｎ对……感兴趣
（１０）
ａｔｔｈｅａｇｅｏｆ．．．在……岁时
（１０）
ｂｅｃｕｒｉｏｕｓａｂｏｕｔ对……感到好奇
（１０）
ｏｆｃｏｕｒｓｅ当然
（１１）
ｔａｋｅｉｔｅａｓｙ别急；沉住气
（１１）
ｅｎｃｏｕｒａｇｅｓｂ．ｔｏｄｏｓｔｈ．鼓励某人做某事（１１）
ｄｒｅａｍａｂｏｕｔ梦想
（１３）
ｉｎｏｒｄｅｒｔｏ为了……
（１３）
ｂｕｙｓｂ．ｓｔｈ．（ｂｕｙｓｔｈ．ｆｏｒｓｂ．）给某人买某物
（１３）
ｆｒｏｍ．．．ｔｏ．．．从……到……
（１５）
ｃｈｅｃｋｉｎ登记
（１５）
ｃｈｅｃｋｏｕｔ借出
（１５）
ｎｏｐｒｏｂｌｅｍ没问题
（１７）
Ｕｎｉｔ２
ｈａｖｅｔｏｄｏｓｔｈ．不得不做某事
（２２）
ｂｅｌｏｎｇｔｏ属于
（２４）
ａｌｌｏｗｓｂ．ｔｏｄｏｓｔｈ．允许某人做某事
（２４）
ｂｙｏｎｅｓｅｌｆ独自一人
（２５）
ｉｎｈｉｓｔｗｅｎｔｉｅｓ在他二十多岁时
（２５）
ｄａｉｌｙｌｉｆｅ日常生活
（２６）
ａｌｉｎｅｏｆ一排；一系列
（２６）
ｓｈｏｕｔｏｕｔ大叫，突然呼喊
（２６）
ｇｏｗｅｌｌ进展顺利
（２７）
ｃｕｔｏｕｔ裁剪
（３０）
ｕｐｓｉｄｅｄｏｗｎ颠倒；倒转
（３０）
ａｓｙｍｂｏｌｏｆ……的象征
（３０）
ｆａｌｌｉｎｌｏｖｅｗｉｔｈ爱上
（３１）
ａｄｉｆｆｅｒｅｎｔｔｙｐｅｏｆ一种不同类型的
（３１）
ｂｅｐｏｐｕｌａｒａｍｏｎｇ在……中受欢迎
（３１）
ａｐａｒｔｏｆ……的一部分
（３４）
Ｕｎｉｔ３
ｔａｋｅｏｎｅ􀆳􀆳ｓｔｅｍｐｅｒａｔｕｒｅ量体温
（３８）
ｌｏｓｅｏｎｅ􀆳􀆳ｓｖｏｉｃｅ失声；嗓子哑
（３８）
ｓｔａｙｕｐｌａｔｅ熬夜
（３８）
ｈａｖｅａｆｅｖｅｒ发烧
（３８）
Useful Expressions in Each Unit
162
ｓｔａｙ／ｋｅｅｐａｗａｙｆｒｏｍ远离……
（３９）
ｎｏｔ．．．ａｔａｌｌ一点也不；根本不
（４０）
ｔａｋｅｓｏｍｅｐｉｌｌｓ服药
（４０）
ｆｏｒｏｎｅｔｈｉｎｇ一来，一方面
（４３）
ｆｏｒａｎｏｔｈｅｒ另一方面
（４３）
ａｇｏｏｄｗａｙｔｏｄｏｓｔｈ．做某事的好方法
（４３）
ｄｏｓｏｍｅｅｘｅｒｃｉｓｅ做运动
（４３）
ｒｉｇｈｔａｗａｙ立刻；马上
（４３）
ｋｅｅｐａｄｉａｒｙ写日志
（４４）
ｉｎｏｎｅ􀆳􀆳ｓｏｐｉｎｉｏｎ在某人看来
（４４）
ｉｎａｇｏｏｄｍｏｏｄ心情愉快
（４４）
ｃｏｍｍｕｎｉｃａｔｅｗｉｔｈｓｂ．与某人交流
（４４）
ｍａｋｅｓｕｒｅｔｏｄｏｓｔｈ．确保做某事
（４４）
ｃｏｍｅａｃｒｏｓｓ偶然发现（某物）；偶然遇见
（某人）
（４５）
ｌｉｖｅａｈａｐｐｙｌｉｆｅ过幸福的生活
（４５）
ｇｅｔｔｈｒｏｕｇｈ度过（难关、困境等）；通过
（４５）
ｂｙｃｈａｎｃｅ偶然；巧合
（４５）
ｂｅｂａｄｆｏｒ对……有害
（４６）
ｗｈａｔ􀆳􀆳ｓｗｏｒｓｅ更糟糕的是
（４６）
ｇｅｔｒｉｄｏｆ摆脱
（４６）
ｌｏｓｅｗｅｉｇｈｔ减肥
（４７）
ｏｎｔｈｅｏｔｈｅｒｈａｎｄ另一方面
（４９）
ｆｏｃｕｓｏｎ专注于
（５２）
ｔａｋｅｕｐ开始从事（某项活动）；占用（时间、
空间等）
（５２）
ｓｔａｙ／ｋｅｅｐｆｉｔ保持健康
（５３）
Ｕｎｉｔ４
ｒｅｇｒｅｔｄｏｉｎｇｓｔｈ．后悔做过某事
（５６）
ｔａｋｅａｄｅｅｐｂｒｅａｔｈ深吸一口气
（５６）
ｈａｖｅｔｈｅｆｌｕ患流感
（５７）
ｈａｖｅａｔｒｙ尝试一下，试试看
（５７）
ｇｉｖｅａｓｐｅｅｃｈ发表演讲
（５７）
ｃｏｍｅｔｏｓｂ．找某人
（５８）
ｋｅｅｐｉｎｔｏｕｃｈｗｉｔｈ跟……保持联系
（５８）
ｇｅｔａｌｏｎｇｗｉｔｈ和……相处
（６０）
ｔａｋｅｐｌａｃｅ发生；进行
（６１）
ｄｅａｌｗｉｔｈ处理，解决；对付
（６１）
ａｎｄｓｏｏｎ等等
（６１）
ｃｏｍｐａｒｅ．．．ｗｉｔｈ．．．把……与……相比
（６１）
ｓｉｇｎｕｐｆｏｒ报名参加
（６２）
ａｄｖｉｓｅｓｂ．ｔｏｄｏｓｔｈ．建议某人做某事
（６２）
ｉｎｐｕｂｌｉｃ公开地；在公共场合
（６４）
ａｒｇｕｅｗｉｔｈｓｂ．与某人争论
（６７）
ｌｉｔｔｌｅｂｙｌｉｔｔｌｅ渐渐；逐渐地
（６７）
ｂｅｂｕｓｙｗｉｔｈ忙于……
（７０）
ａｔａｌｏｓｓ困惑；不知所措
（７０）
Ｕｎｉｔ５
ｂｅｍａｄｅｏｆ由……制成
（７６）
ｂｅｒｉｃｈｉｎ富含；充满
（７８）
ｂｅｋｎｏｗｎｆｏｒ因……而众所周知
（７９）
ｍａｋｅｂｅｔｔｅｒｕｓｅｏｆ更好地利用
（８０）
ｆｅｅｌｆｒｅｅ随意
（８０）
ｌｅａｖｅｓｂ．ａｎｙｍｅｓｓａｇｅ给某人留言
（８０）
ｂｅｈｅｌｐｆｕｌｆｏｒ对……有帮助
（８２）
ｗａｒｎｓｂ．（ｎｏｔ）ｔｏｄｏｓｔｈ．劝告／告诫某人
（不要）做某事
（８３）
ｂｅｓｈｏｒｔｏｆ缺乏……
（８３）
Useful Expressions in Each Unit 163
ｌｏｏｋｆｏｒｗａｒｄｔｏ盼望
（８３）
ｉｎｓｈａｐｅｓｏｆ呈……的形状
（８４）
ｍｉｌｌｉｏｎｓｏｆ数百万的
（８７）
ｐｒｅｆｅｒｔｏｄｏｓｔｈ．更喜欢做某事；宁可做某事
（８８）
ｂｅｐｏｐｕｌａｒｗｉｔｈ受……欢迎
（８８）
Ｕｎｉｔ６
ｇｏａｒｏｕｎｄ绕行；走遍；传播
（９２）
ｓｅｎｄ．．．ｉｎｔｏ．．．把……送／派遣到……
（９２）
ｍｏｖｅａｒｏｕｎｄ绕着……来回转
（９２）
ａｔｌｅａｓｔ至少
（９７）
ｎｅｉｔｈｅｒ．．．ｎｏｒ．．．既不……也不……
（９７）
ａｓｗｅｌｌａｓ除……之外；也；还
（９７）
ｂｅｓｉｍｉｌａｒｔｏ与……相似
（９８）
ａｔａｄｉｓｔａｎｃｅｏｆ在……的距离
（９８）
ｂｅａｌｉｖｅｗｉｔｈ充满着……
（９９）
ｍａｋｅｕｐ组成；化妆；编造
（９９）
ｐｌａｙａｎｉｍｐｏｒｔａｎｔｒｏｌｅｉｎ在……起重要作用
（１００）
ｂｅｒｅｌａｔｅｄｔｏ与……有关
（１００）
ｈａｖｅｓｏｍｅｔｈｉｎｇｉｎｃｏｍｍｏｎ有相同的特征；
有共同之处
（１０３）
ｒｕｎａｗａｙ逃跑；跑开
（１０６）
ｓｏ．．．ｔｈａｔ．．．如此……以至于……
（１０７）
Attached Word List
164
ＡｔｔａｃｈｅｄＷｏｒｄＬｉｓｔ
ａｌｉｋｅ／əˈｌａＩｋ／ａｄｊ．相像；十分相似
ａｒｔｗｏｒｋ／ˈ􀱷􀱷ːｔｗɜːｋ／；／ˈ􀱷􀱷ːｒｔｗɜːｒｋ／ｎ．（尤指
博物馆里的）艺术作品
ａｓｐｅｃｔ／ˈæｓｐｅｋｔ／ｎ．方面；层面
ａｓｓｉｍｉｌａｔｉｏｎ／əˌｓＩｍəˈｌｅＩʃ（ə）ｎ／ｎ．同化；同化现象
ａｔｔｉｔｕｄｅ／ˈæｔＩｔｊｕːｄ／；／ˈæｔＩｔｕːｄ／ｎ．态度；看法
ａｕｔｈｏｒ／ˈɔː􀱺􀱺ə（ｒ）／ｎ．作者；作家
ｂｒａｉｎｓｔｏｒｍ／ˈｂｒｅＩｎｓｔɔːｍ／；／ˈｂｒｅＩｎｓｔɔːｒｍ／
ｖ．头脑风暴，集思广益
ｂｒｉｅｆｌｙ／ˈｂｒｉːｆｌｉː／ａｄｖ．短暂地；暂时地
ｃｌａｓｓｉｆｉｃａｔｉｏｎ／ˌｋｌæｓＩｆＩˈｋｅＩʃｎ／ｎ．分类，归类
ｃｌａｓｓｉｆｙ／ˈｋｌæｓＩｆａＩ／ｖ．分类，归类
ｃｏｍｂｉｎｅ／ｋəｍˈｂａＩｎ／ｖ．（使）结合，组合
ｃｏｍｍｅｎｔ／ˈｋɒｍｅｎｔ／；／ˈｋ􀱷􀱷ːｍｅｎｔ／ｎ．，ｖ．议论；
评论；解释
ｃｏｍｐａｒａｔｉｖｅ／ｋəｍˈｐæｒəｔＩｖ／ａｄｊ．比较的，
相比的
ｃｏｎｃｌｕｄｅ／ｋəｎˈｋｌｕːｄ／ｖ．断定；推断出；
得出结论
ｃｏｎｃｌｕｓｉｏｎ／ｋəｎˈｋｌｕːʒｎ／ｎ．结论，推论
ｃｏｎｓｉｄｅｒ／ｋəｎˈｓＩｄə（ｒ）／ｖ．仔细考虑，细想
ｃｏｒｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ／ｋəˈｒｅｋʃｎ／ｎ．改正；纠正；修正
ｄｉｒｅｃｔｌｙ／ｄəˈｒｅｋｔｌｉ；ｄａＩˈｒｅｋｔｌｉ／ａｄｖ．径直；
直接
ｄｉｓｔｉｎｇｕｉｓｈ／ｄＩˈｓｔＩ􀱻􀱻ｇｗＩʃ ／ｖ．区分；辨别；分清
ｅｘｃｈａｎｇｅ／ＩｋｓˈｔʃｅＩｎｄʒ ／ｎ．，ｖ．交流
ｅｘｃｌａｍａｔｏｒｙ／Ｉｋˈｓｋｌæｍəｔｒｉ／；／Ｉｋˈｓｋｌæｍəｔɔːｒｉ／
ａｄｊ．表示感叹的，惊叹的
ｅｘｃｌａｍａｔｏｒｙｓｅｎｔｅｎｃｅ感叹句
ｆｌｏｗ／ｆｌəʊ／ｖ．流；流动
ｆｕｔｕｒｅｔｅｎｓｅ将来时
ｇｅｎｅｒａｌ／ˈｄʒｅｎｒəｌ／ａｄｊ．概括性的；大致的；
普遍的
ｇｒｏｗｔｈ／ｇｒəʊ􀱺􀱺／ｎ．发育；成长；生长
ｉｌｌｎｅｓｓ／ˈＩｌｎəｓ／ｎ．（身体或精神上的）疾病
ｉｎｃｏｍｐｌｅｔｅ／ˌＩｎｋəｍˈｐｌｉːｔ／ａｄｊ．不完全的；
不完整的
ｉｎｄｅｆｉｎｉｔｅ／ＩｎˈｄｅｆＩｎəｔ／ａｄｊ．不定的；无限期的；
期限不定的
ｉｎｆｉｎｉｔｉｖｅ／ＩｎˈｆＩｎəｔＩｖ／ｎ．不定式
ｉｎｔｅｒｖｉｅｗ／ˈＩｎｔəｖｊｕː／；／ˈＩｎｔəｒｖｊｕː／
ｎ．，ｖ．面试；面谈
ｋｅｙｗｏｒｄ／ˈｋｉːｗɜːｄ／；／ˈｋｉːｗɜːｒｄ／ｎ．关键词；
重要概念
ｍｅａｓｕｒｅｍｅｎｔ／ˈｍｅʒəｍəｎｔ／；／ˈｍｅʒəｒｍəｎｔ／
ｎ．尺寸，长度；测量
ｏｂｊｅｃｔｃｏｍｐｌｅｍｅｎｔ宾语补足语
ｏｒｉｇｉｎａｌ／əˈｒＩｄʒəｎｌ／ａｄｊ．原来的；独创的
Attached Word List 165
ｐａｓｔｃｏｎｔｉｎｕｏｕｓｔｅｎｓｅ过去进行时
ｐａｔｔｅｒｎ／ˈｐæｔｎ／；／ˈｐæｔəｒｎ／ｎ．范例
ｐａｕｓｅ／ｐɔːｚ／ｎ．，ｖ．停顿
ｐｌｏｓｉｏｎ／ˈｐｌəʊʒ（ə）ｎ／ｎ．（语音）爆破，
爆破音
ｐｒｅｆｉｘ／ˈｐｒｉːｆＩｋｓ／ｎ．前缀
ｒｅｄｕｃｅ／ｒＩˈｄｊｕːｓ／；／ｒＩˈｄｕːｓ／ｖ．减少，缩小
ｒｅｆｅｒ／ｒＩˈｆɜː（ｒ）／ｖ．提到；参考
ｓｉｔｕａｔｉｏｎ／ˌｓＩｔʃｕˈｅＩʃ（ə）ｎ／ｎ．情况；
状况；形势；局面
ｓｌｉｇｈｔ／ｓｌａＩｔ／ａｄｊ．轻微的；略微的
ｓｏｎｏｒｉｚａｔｉｏｎ／ˌｓəʊｎəｒａＩˈｚｅＩʃəｎ／ｎ．浊音化
ｓｔａｒｇａｚｉｎｇ／ˈｓｔ􀱷􀱷ːｇｅＩｚＩ􀱻􀱻／；／ˈｓｔ􀱷􀱷ːｒｇｅＩｚＩ􀱻􀱻／
ｎ．天体观察
ｓｔｏｒｙｔｅｌｌｅｒ／ˈｓｔɔːｒｉｔｅｌə（ｒ）／ｎ．讲故事的人
ｓｕｆｆｉｘ／ˈｓʌｆＩｋｓ／ｎ．后缀
ｓｕｐｅｒｌａｔｉｖｅ／ｓｕːˈｐɜːｌəｔＩｖ／；／ｓｕːˈｐɜːｒｌəｔＩｖ／
ａｄｊ．最高级的；极佳的；卓越的；最优秀的
ｕｎｈｅａｌｔｈｙ／ʌｎˈｈｅｌ􀱺􀱺ｉ／ａｄｊ．不健康的；虚弱的
ｕｎｉｍｐｏｒｔａｎｔ／ˌʌｎＩｍˈｐɔːｔｎｔ／；／ˌʌｎＩｍˈｐɔːｒｔｎｔ／
ａｄｊ．不重要的；次要的
ｕｎｓｔｒｅｓｓｅｄ／ˌʌｎˈｓｔｒｅｓｔ／ａｄｊ．（语音）非重读的，
轻读的
ｗｈｅｔｈｅｒ／ˈｗｅðə（ｒ）／；／ˈｗｅðəｒ／ｃｏｎｊ．是否
ｗｏｒｋｄａｙ／ˈｗɜːｋｄｅＩ／；／ˈｗɜːｒｋｄｅＩ／ｎ．一天中
的工作时间
English Names
166
ＥｎｇｌｉｓｈＮａｍｅｓ
ＣｌｙｄｅＴｏｍｂａｕｇｈ／ｋｌａＩｄˈｔɒｍｂɔ ／
克莱德·汤博
ＬｅｏｎａｒｄｏｄａＶｉｎｃｉ／ˌｌｉːəˈｎ􀱷􀱷ːｄəʊ ｄə ˈｖＩｎｔʃｉ／
莱昂纳多·达·芬奇
Ｍｉｃｈａｅｌ／ˈｍａＩｋəｌ／迈克尔
Ｍｉｋｅ／ｍａＩｋ／麦克
ＭｏｎａＬｉｓａ／ˈｍəʊｎə ˈｌｉːｓə ／蒙娜丽莎
ＭｕｍｔａｚＭａｈａｌ／ｍʌｍｔａＩｚｍəˈｈ􀱷􀱷ːｌ／
慕塔芝·玛哈
ＮｉｃｏｌａｕｓＣｏｐｅｒｎｉｃｕｓ／ｎｉｋəｌａʊｓｋｏʊˈｐɜｒｎＩｋəｓ／
尼古拉·哥白尼
ＳｈａｈＪａｈａｎ／ˈʃａː ｄʒəˈｈ􀱷􀱷ːｎ／沙·贾汗
Names of Places 167
ＮａｍｅｓｏｆＰｌａｃｅｓ
Ａｓｉａ／ˈｅＩʒə；ˈｅＩʃə ／ｎ．亚洲
Ａｕｓｔｒａｌｉａ／ɒˈｓｔｒｅＩｌｉə ／；／ɔːˈｓｔｒｅＩｌｉə ／
ｎ．澳大利亚
Ｂｅｎｎｅｌｏｎｇ／ˌｂｅｎＩˈｌɔː􀱻􀱻／Ｒｅｓｔａｕｒａｎｔ
本尼龙餐厅
ＢｉｇＢｅｎ大本钟
Ｂｉｒｄ􀆳􀆳ｓＮｅｓｔ鸟巢
Ｅｎｇｌａｎｄ／ˈＩ􀱻􀱻ｇｌəｎｄ／ｎ．英格兰
Ｈａｄｒｉａｎ􀆳􀆳ｓ／ˈｈｅＩｄｒｉəｎ／Ｗａｌｌ哈德良长城
Ｉｔａｌｙ／ˈＩｔəｌｉ／ｎ．意大利
ＬａｋｅＨｉｌｌｉｅｒ／ｈＩｌｉə（ｒ）／希利尔湖
Ｌｏｎｄｏｎ／ˈｌʌｎｄəｎ／伦敦
ＭｏｕｎｔＦｕｊｉ／ｍａʊｎｔˈｆｕｄʒｉ／富士山
ＭｏｕｎｔＨｕａｎｇｓｈａｎ黄山
ＭｏｕｎｔＴａｉｓｈａｎ泰山
Ｎｉａｇａｒａ／ｎａＩˈæｇｒə ／Ｆａｌｌｓ尼亚加拉大瀑布
ＮｉａｇａｒａＲｉｖｅｒ尼亚加拉河
ＮｏｒｔｈＡｍｅｒｉｃａ北美洲
Ｐａｒｉｓ／ˈｐæｒＩｓ／ｎ．巴黎
Ｐｉｓａ／ˈｐｉːｚə ／比萨
Ｐｏｌａｎｄ／ˈｐəʊｌəｎｄ／波兰
Ｓｙｄｎｅｙ／ˈｓＩｄｎｉ／悉尼
ｔｈｅＥｉｆｆｅｌＴｏｗｅｒ／ˈａＩｆəｌˈｔａʊə（ｒ）／
埃菲尔铁塔
ｔｈｅＧｒｅａｔＷａｌｌ长城
ｔｈｅＨｏｎｇｈｅＨａｎｉＲｉｃｅＴｅｒｒａｃｅｓ
红河哈尼梯田
ｔｈｅＩｎｄｉａＯｃｅａｎ印度洋
ｔｈｅＰａｌａｃｅ／ˈｐæｌəｓ／Ｍｕｓｅｕｍ故宫博物院
ｔｈｅＰｏｔａｌａＰａｌａｃｅ布达拉宫
ｔｈｅＴａｊＭａｈａｌ泰姬陵
ｔｈｅＷｅｓｔＬａｋｅ西湖
Ｔｉａｎ􀆳􀆳ａｎｍｅｎＳｑｕａｒｅ天安门广场
ＹｅｌｌｏｗｓｔｏｎｅＮａｔｉｏｎａｌＰａｒｋ黄石国家公园
Irregular Verbs
168
ＩｒｒｅｇｕｌａｒＶｅｒｂｓ
Ｉｎｆｉｎｉｔｉｖｅ
Ｐａｓｔｔｅｎｓｅ
　　
ｂｅ（ａｍ，ｉｓ，ａｒｅ）
ｗａｓ／ｗɒｚ／；／ｗʌｚ／
ｗｅｒｅ／ｗɜː（ｒ）／
ｂｅａｒ
ｂｏｒｅ／ｂɔː（ｒ）／
ｂｒｅａｋ
ｂｒｏｋｅ／ｂｒəʊｋ／
ｂｕｒｎ
ｂｕｒｎｔ／ｂɜːｎｔ／；／ｂɜːｒｎｔ／
ｂｕｒｎｅｄ／ｂɜːｎｄ／；／ｂɜːｒｎｄ／
ｃｈｏｏｓｅ
ｃｈｏｓｅ／ｔʃəʊｚ／
ｃｏｓｔ
ｃｏｓｔ／ｋɒｓｔ／；／ｋɔːｓｔ／
ｄｅａｌ
ｄｅａｌｔ／ｄｅｌｔ／
ｄｒａｗ
ｄｒｅｗ／ｄｒｕː／
ｆａｌｌ
ｆｅｌｌ／ｆｅｌ／
ｆｅｅｌ
ｆｅｌｔ／ｆｅｌｔ／
ｆｒｅｅｚｅ
ｆｒｏｚｅ／ｆｒəʊｚ／
ｇｅｔ
ｇｏｔ／ｇɒｔ／；／ｇ􀱷􀱷ːｔ／
ｇｒｏｗ
ｇｒｅｗ／ｇｒｕː／
ｈａｖｅ
ｈａｄ／ｈæｄ／
ｈｅａｒ
ｈｅａｒｄ／ｈɜːｄ／；／ｈɜːｒｄ／
ｈｉｄｅ
ｈｉｄ／ｈＩｄ／
ｌｅａｄ
ｌｅｄ／ｌｅｄ／
ｌｅａｎ
ｌｅａｎｅｄ／ｌｉːｎｄ／
ｌｅａｎｔ／ｌｅｎｔ／
Ｉｎｆｉｎｉｔｉｖｅ
Ｐａｓｔｔｅｎｓｅ
　　
ｌｅａｖｅ
ｌｅｆｔ／ｌｅｆｔ／
ｌｏｓｅ
ｌｏｓｔ／ｌɒｓｔ／；／ｌɔːｓｔ／
ｍｅａｎ
ｍｅａｎｔ／ｍｅｎｔ／
ｒｉｄｅ
ｒｏｄｅ／ｒəʊｄ／
ｒｉｓｅ
ｒｏｓｅ／ｒəʊｚ／
ｓｅｅｋ
ｓｏｕｇｈｔ／ｓɔːｔ／
ｓｅｌｌ
ｓｏｌｄ／ｓəʊｌｄ／
ｓｅｎｄ
ｓｅｎｔ／ｓｅｎｔ／
ｓｈａｋｅ
ｓｈｏｏｋ／ʃʊｋ／
ｓｈａｌｌ
ｓｈｏｕｌｄ／ʃʊｄ／
ｓｈｉｎｅ
ｓｈｏｎｅ／ʃɒｎ／；／ʃəʊｎ／
ｓｉｎｋ
ｓａｎｋ／ｓæ􀱻􀱻ｋ／
ｓｕｎｋ／ｓʌ􀱻􀱻ｋ／
ｓｉｔ
ｓａｔ／ｓæｔ／
ｓｌｅｅｐ
ｓｌｅｐｔ／ｓｌｅｐｔ／
ｓｐｅｎｄ
ｓｐｅｎｔ／ｓｐｅｎｔ／
ｓｐｒｅａｄ
ｓｐｒｅａｄ／ｓｐｒｅｄ／
ｔｅａｃｈ
ｔａｕｇｈｔ／ｔɔːｔ／
ｗａｋｅ
ｗｏｋｅ／ｗəʊｋ／
ｗｅａｒ
ｗｏｒｅ／ｗɔː（ｒ）／；／ｗɔːｒ／
ｗｉｎ
ｗｏｎ／ｗʌｎ／
􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈􀤈
后      记
本套教科书根据教育部最新颁布的《义务教育英语课程标准（2022年版）》（以下
简称“课标”）编修。
教科书编修小组由主编、副主编和编委组成，同时聘请肖思宇、单小明、邓华、邓
元、李澧、王若婷、廖芬芳、李艳玲、赖永晖、王培俭、梁晶等二十余人全程参与编修
工作。编修小组在全国十个省区市对原教科书的使用情况进行调查，广泛收集广大师生
用户的意见和建议，深入分析原教科书中有待修订的内容。在此基础上，编修小组制订
了详细的工作方案，随即启动了编修工作。编修小组深入学习课标，深刻领会课标精
神，拟定了编修思路，对原教科书的整体结构、单元编排、素材选编、活动安排、人
物形象及插图等进行了全新设计。按新思路编修的教科书具有以下特色：注重核心素
养的全面与协同发展，彰显课程的育人价值；按主题对单元进行整体编排，帮助学生
形成单元主题大观念；践行英语学习活动观，引导学生“在体验中学习，在应用中实
践，在迁移中创新”；开展思维和策略的显性教学，强调通过目标明确、内容具体、
步骤清晰的显性教学促进学生思维品质和学习能力的发展；注重学生对中外优秀文化
的学习，拓宽学生的国际视野，坚定学生的文化自信。
自初稿定稿到出版发行，本套教科书经过了多轮修改和反复打磨。其间，得到了诸
多英语教育专家、教研员和一线教师的指导和帮助，另有数百名教师和学生参与了本套
教科书的试教试用。在此，谨对他们的宝贵意见和辛劳付出表示衷心感谢！
教科书使用过程中，如有任何意见和建议，欢迎随时联系我们。
电子邮箱：zks_zongbianshi@163.com
联系电话：（010）63581202